Buick 2001 Park Avenue Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-23

: Buick Buick-2001-Buick-Park-Avenue-Owners-Manual-812644 buick-2001-buick-park-avenue-owners-manual-812644 buick pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 392 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Free
lockout assistance
Free
dead-battery assistance
Free
out-of-fuel assistance
Free
flat-tire change
Emergency
towing
1-800-252-1112
(
For vehicles purchased in Canada,
call
1-800-268-6800
)
that provides in an emergency:
1-800-252-1112
(
For vehicles purchased in Canada,
call
1-800-268-6800
)
Courtesy
Transportation
Every
2001
Park Avenue
under warranty is
backed with the
following
services:
2001 Buick Park Avenue
Owner's Manual
Litho in U.S.A.
Part Number 25711389 A First Edition © Copyright General Motors Corporation 2000
All Rights Reserved i
Table of Contents
Windows
Keys and Door Locks
Remote Keyless Entry System
Trunk Release
Automatic Transaxle
Parking Brake
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Windshield Wipers
Cruise Control
Exterior and Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Convenience Net
Auxiliary Power Outlets
OnStar® System (If Equipped)
Sunroof (Option)
HomeLink® Transmitter (If Equipped)
Instrument Panel, Warning Lights and Gages
Driver Information Center (If Equipped)
Personal Choice Features
Head-Up Display (If Equipped)
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (Option)
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts Air Bag Systems
Restraint Systems for Children
Section
1
Section
2
Seats and Restraint Systems
Features and Controls
ii
Table of Contents (cont'd)
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Driving Tips for Various Road Conditions
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
Heating and Air Conditioning
Setting the Radio Clock
Radio/Cassette Player/CD Player
Radio Theft-Deterrent Feature
Steering Wheel Controls
Hazard Warning Flashers
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
Changing a Flat Tire
If You're Stuck
Problems on the Road
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
Your Driving and the Road
Section
5
Section
4
Section
3
iii
Table of Contents (cont'd)
Maintenance Schedule
Service and Appearance Care
Section
7
Section
6
Scheduled Maintenance
Owner Checks and Services
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Maintenance Records
Fuel
Checking Fluids and Lubricants
GM Oil Life System™ (If Equipped)
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Brakes
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires and Wheels
Appearance Care
Electrical System/Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
iv
Table of Contents (cont'd)
Customer Assistance Information
In the Index you will find an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual.
You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.
Section
8
Customer Satisfaction Procedures
Customer Assistance Offices
Roadside Assistance and Courtesy Transportation
Warranty Information (See Warranty Manual)
Reporting Safety Defects on page 8-9
Service Publications
Index
Section
9
Please refer to the last page of this manual for your
Service Station Guide
v
vi
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, BUICK,
the BUICK Emblem and the name PARK AVENUE are
registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Buick Motor Division whenever it
appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new
owner can use it.
We support voluntary
technician certification.
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
vii
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If
you do this, it will help you learn about the features
and controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll
find that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
viii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
NOTICE:
These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
In the notice area, we tell you about something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, and it could be
costly. But the notice will tell you what to do to help
avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different
colors or in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
ix
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
These symbols
are important for
you and your
passengers
whenever your
vehicle is driven:
CHILD
RESTRAINT
TOP STRAP
ANCHOR
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
POWER
WINDOW
AIR BAG
These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:
MASTER
LIGHTING
SWITCH
TURN
SIGNALS
PARKING
LAMPS
HAZARD
WARNING
FLASHER
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LAMPS
FOG LAMPS
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
WINDSHIELD
WASHER
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
VENTILATING
FAN
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
BRAKE
COOLANT
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
FUSE
LIGHTER
HORN
FUEL
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle. Also see “Warning Lights and Gages” in the Index.
Tire Pressure
See Section 6
Service Station Guide
Oil Viscosity
Engine Oil
See Section 6
Engine Oil Dipstick
See Section 6
Remote Fuel
Door Release
See Section 6
Cooling System
See Section 5
Hood Release
See Section 6
Windshield Washer
Fluid
See Section 6
Spare Tire Pressure
See Section 5
Alternate
Fuel Door Release
See Section 6
Battery
See Section 6
For
a More
Detailed Look at
What's Under the Hood
See Section 6
Fuel
Use unleaded only.
See Section 6
for octane ratings.
1- 1-1
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2 Seats and Seat Controls
1-8 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
1-13 Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
1-14 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
1-14 Driver Position
1-20 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
1-21 Right Front Passenger Position
1-21 Air Bag Systems
1-29 Center Passenger Position
1-31 Rear Seat Passengers
1-34 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
1-36 Children
1-40 Restraint Systems for Children
1-52 Older Children
1-55 Safety Belt Extender
1-56 Checking Your Restraint Systems
1-56 Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
1-2
Seats and Seat Controls
This part tells you about the seats -- how to adjust them,
and also about memory seats, reclining seatbacks and
head restraints.
Power Seats
Raise or lower the front of the seat cushion by
holding the front part of the horizontal control up
or down.
Raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion by
holding the rear part of the horizontal control up
or down.
Raise or lower the entire seat cushion by holding
the whole horizontal control up or down.
Move the seat forward or backward by pushing
the horizontal control to the front or back.
Push the vertical control forward to bring the seat to
a more upright position. Push it rearward to recline
the seatback.
Raise or lower the shoulder belt by pushing the
vertical control up or down.
1-3
4-Way Power Lumbar Control (Option)
If you have this option, the
driver’s and passenger’s
seatback lumbar support can
be adjusted four ways by
moving the single switch
located on the outboard side
of the seat.
To increase or decrease support, hold the switch forward
or rearward. To move the lumbar up or down, hold the
switch upward or downward.
Memory Seat and Mirrors (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls on the
driver’s door panel are used
to program and recall
previous settings.
You can use this function to save your seat cushion
positions (including the shoulder belt height adjuster),
recliner, lumbar, mirror adjustment, personal choice
settings, comfort controls and radio settings.
1-4
To save your seat and mirror positions into memory,
use the following procedure:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat and lumbar position to a
safe and comfortable driving position. Adjust both
outside mirrors to suit you. See “Outside Mirrors”
in the Index.
2. Press and hold the MEMORY button (1 or 2)
corresponding with your DRIVER # displayed on the
DIC for longer than three seconds. You will hear
two beeps confirming that the seat and mirror
positions have been entered into memory.
To set the seat and mirror positions for a second driver,
follow the previous steps, but start by pressing the
button with the unlock symbol on the transmitter that
displays the other DRIVER # on the DIC. Be sure to use
the MEMORY button (1 or 2) which corresponds to the
DRIVER # identified by the second transmitter.
To store the exit position for an easy exit, use the
following procedure:
1. First identify the DRIVER # by pressing the
MEMORY button (1 or 2) or by pressing the
button with the unlock symbol on the transmitter.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired exit position.
3. Press and hold the EXIT button for longer than
three seconds. You will hear two beeps confirming that
the seat exit position has been entered into memory.
To set the exit position for a second driver, follow the
previous steps, but start by pressing the button with
the unlock symbol on the transmitter that displays the
other DRIVER # on the DIC. Be sure to use the
MEMORY button (1 or 2) which corresponds to the
DRIVER # identified by the other transmitter.
To recall your memory positions, your vehicle must be
in PARK (P). Push and release the MEMORY button
(1 or 2) corresponding to the desired driving position.
The seat and mirrors will move to the position previously
stored for the identified driver. You will hear one beep.
1-5
To stop recall movement of the seat at any time, press
the driver’s power seat control located on the outboard
side of the front seat.
To recall the exit position, your vehicle must be in
PARK (P). Push and release the EXIT button and the
seat will move to the exit position previously stored for
the current identified driver. You will hear one beep.
If an exit position has not been stored for the current
identified driver, the seat will move all the way back.
Mirrors, lumbar and shoulder belt height adjuster
positions will not be stored or recalled for the
exit position.
If you would like your stored driving or exit position
to be recalled when unlocking your vehicle with the
transmitter, see “Personal Choice Features, Memory
Seat Recall” in the Index.
Heated Seats (Option)
The heated seat controls are
located next to the climate
controls on the instrument
panel. Press this button to
turn on the heating element
in the seat.
When the heated seat control is first pressed, the
HI setting is activated. Press the button again for the
LO setting. The third press of the button turns the
feature off.
The LO setting warms the seatback and cushion until the
seat nears body temperature. The HI setting heats the
seat to a slightly higher temperature.
A light on the control reminds you that the heating
system is in use. When the ignition is turned off, the
heating element is also turned off.
1-6
Reclining Front Seatbacks
The vertical control described previously in this section
reclines the front seatbacks.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.
CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash you
could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.
1-7
Head Restraints
Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the
restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
On some models, the head restraints tilt forward and
rearward also.
Adjust the head restraint by grasping the top of the
restraint and moving it forward or rearward until it is in
the desired position.
Some rear seats have adjustable head restraints. Slide an
adjustable head restraint up or down so that the top of
the restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This
position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
On some models, the head restraints tilt forward and
rearward also.
There are three different positions for the rear seat head
restraints. Adjust a rear head restraint by grasping the
top of the restraint and moving it forward the way you
want it to go until you hear a click. It will then be locked
into position until you need to move it again. Pulling it
forward past the last position will allow the head
restraint to return to its full rear position.
1-8
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the air bag system.
CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.
CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
1-9
Your vehicle has a light that
comes on as a reminder to
buckle up. See “Safety Belt
Reminder Light” in
the Index.
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
1-10
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels.
Put someone on it.
1-11
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop. The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
1-12
or the instrument panel ... or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-13
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will
be in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less
than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-14
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about safety
belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller
children and babies. If a child will be riding in your
vehicle, see the part of this manual called “Children.”
Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
1-15
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash, or
if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt height
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Using the power seat control, raise or lower the
shoulder belt height adjuster by pushing the vertical
control up or down.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of
the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder.
1-16
Q: What’s wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
1-17
Q: What’s wrong with this?
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
1-18
Q: What’s wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.
1-19
Q: What’s wrong with this?
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the
belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted,
make it straight so it can work properly, or ask
your dealer to fix it.
1-20
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-21
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt
properly, see “Driver Position” earlier in this section.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt -- except for one thing.
If you ever pull the lap portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and
start again.
If your vehicle has a center passenger position, be
sure to use the correct buckle when buckling your
lap-shoulder belt. If you find that the latch plate will not
go fully into the buckle, see if you are using the buckle
for the center passenger position.
Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact
air bag systems.
Your vehicle has four air bags -- a frontal air bag for
the driver, another frontal air bag for the right front
passenger, a side impact air bag for the driver, and
another side impact air bag for the right front passenger.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag. But
these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job
and comply with federal regulations.
1-22
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag systems:
CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt -- even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety
belts. All air bags are designed to work with
safety belts but don’t replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to work only in moderate
to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle
hits something. They aren’t designed to inflate at
all in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal
crashes. And, for unrestrained occupants, frontal
air bags may provide less protection in frontal
crashes than more forceful air bags have
provided in the past. The side impact air bags for
the driver and right front passenger are designed
to inflate only in moderate to severe crashes
where something hits the side of your vehicle.
They aren’t designed to inflate in frontal, in
rollover or in rear crashes. Everyone in
your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly -- whether or not there’s an air bag
for that person.
1-23
CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate with
great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If
you’re too close to an inflating air bag, as you
would be if you were leaning forward, it could
seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you in
position for air bag inflation before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
frontal air bags. The driver should sit as far back
as possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle. Front occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door.
CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety
belt system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see the part of this
manual called “Children.”
1-24
There is an air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel,
which shows
AIR BAG.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
How the Air Bag Systems Work
Where are the air bags?
The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-25
The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s side impact air bag is in the side of the
driver’s seatback closest to the door.
The right front passenger’s side impact air bag is in the
side of the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
1-26
CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person. The path
of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t
put anything between an occupant and an air
bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering and don’t let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact air bag.
When should an air bag inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.”
If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t move
or deform, the threshold level is about 9 to 15 mph
(14 to 24 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however,
with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat
above or below this range.
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform,
such as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher.
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags are
not designed to inflate in rollovers, side impacts, or rear
impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant.
The side impact air bags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact air bag
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are not
designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only
deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For
frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle of
the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in
frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact air
bags, inflation is determined by the location and severity
of the impact.
1-27
What makes an air bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both
frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates
the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware
are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering
wheel, instrument panel and the side of the front
seatbacks closest to the door.
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontal air
bags would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts, and side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
the air bag. Side impact air bags would not help you in
many types of collisions, including frontal or near
frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily
because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those air bags.
Air bags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in
moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions for
the driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags,
and only in moderate to severe side collisions for the
driver’s and right front passenger’s side impact air bags.
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that
some people may not even realize the air bag inflated.
Some components of the air bag module -- the steering
wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the instrument panel for
the right front passenger’s bag, the side of the seatback
closest to the door for the driver and right front
passenger’s side impact air bags -- will be hot for a short
time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the
driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor
does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
1-28
CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door.
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for your
air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag
system won’t be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include air bag modules
and possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information about
the frontal air bag system. The module records
information about the readiness of the system, when
the system commands air bag inflation and driver’s
safety belt usage at deployment. The module also
records speed, engine rpm, brake and throttle data.
Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air bag
system won’t work properly. See your dealer for service.
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or
the right front passenger’s air bag, or the air bag
covering on the driver’s and right front
passenger’s seatback, the bag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the air bag
module in the steering wheel, both the air bag
module and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s air bag, or both the air bag
module and seatback for the driver’s and
right front passenger’s side impact air bag.
Do not open or break the air bag coverings.
1-29
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing your vehicle and the
air bag systems. To purchase a service manual, see
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air
bag can still inflate during improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an air bag when
it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are
probably part of the air bag systems. Be sure to
follow proper service procedures, and make sure
the person performing work for you is qualified
to do so.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
Center Passenger Position
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has a front split seat and a rear bench
seat, someone can sit in the center positions.
1-30
When you sit in a center seating position, you have a lap
safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
1-31
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1-32
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the
release button on the buckle is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-33
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-34
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have
outgrown booster seats and for small adults. When
installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better
positions the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position in
the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for
children who have outgrown child restraints and for
smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on
the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide
and use the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the side
of the seatback.
1-35
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into
the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-36
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions”
earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out from
the guides. Slide the guide into its storage pocket on the
side of the seatback.
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the
law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Infants and Young Children
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by the
appropriate restraint. Young children should not use the
vehicle’s safety belts, unless there is no other choice.
1-37
CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby will
become so heavy it is not possible to hold it.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
For example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h),
a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a
240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s arms. A baby
should be secured in an appropriate restraint.
1-38
CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
outstanding protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air
bag system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are many
different models available. When purchasing a child
restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor
vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label saying that
it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In
addition, there are many kinds of restraints
available for children with special needs.
1-39
CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s hip
bones are still so small that vehicle’s regular
safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones,
as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply
force on a body area that’s unprotected by any
bony structure. This alone could cause serious or
fatal injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
1-40
Restraint Systems for Children
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed to
restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface.
Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center
of the vehicle.
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-41
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some
high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A
booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.
1-42
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which is
purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help reduce
the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point
harness system has two shoulder straps, two hip
straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take the
place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder
straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low
against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type
shield has straps that are attached to a wide,
shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from
the manufacturer.
1-43
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors, therefore, recommends that child
restraints be secured in the rear seat including an infant
riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a
booster seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in
the front passenger seat. Here’s why:
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure
a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, but before you do, always
move the front passenger seat as far back as it
will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the right front
passenger air bag if it inflates. Never secure a
child restraint in the center front seat. It’s always
better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat.
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front passenger seat, but before you
do, always move the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It’s better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
1-44
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored
to the vehicle.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can be
obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask the child
restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints also
have a top strap. If your child restraint has a top strap, it
should be anchored.
Your vehicle has top strap anchors already installed for
the rear seating positions. You’ll find them behind the
rear seat on the filler panel.
In order to get to a bracket, you’ll have to open
the trim cover.
1-45
Anchor the top strap to one of these anchor points. Be sure
to use an anchor point located on the same side of the
vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will
be placed. If you have an adjustable head restraint, raise
the head restraint and route the top strap under it.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to
secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top strap
when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier
part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-46
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-47
4. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while
you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using
a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-48
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Rear Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the right front
passenger air bag if it inflates. Never secure a
child restraint in the center front seat. It’s always
better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat.
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front passenger seat, but before you
do, always move the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It’s better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
See the earlier part about the top strap if the child
restraint has one.
1-49
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you’re using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-50
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger
child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure
a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will go
before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See “Seats” in the Index.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
1-51
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock.
1-52
6. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
You may find it helpful to use your knee to push
down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Older Children
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-53
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should
not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the
thighs. It should never be worn over the abdomen,
which could cause severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use
safety belts properly.
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt. The
belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. In a
crash, the two children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be used by
only one person at a time.
1-54
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is
very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide. If the
child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see
“Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index.
If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still
very close to the child’s face or neck, you might
want to place the child in the center seat position,
the one that has only a lap belt.
1-55
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in
a crash the child might slide under the belt. The
belt’s force would then be applied right on the
child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will
be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
1-56
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is
torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.
2- 2-1
Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2 Windows
2-4 Keys
2-6 Door Locks
2-10 Remote Keyless Entry System
2-15 Trunk
2-17 Theft
2-18 Content Theft-Deterrent System
2-20 PASS-Key III
2-22 New Vehicle “Break-In”
2-22 Ignition Positions
2-24 Starting Your Engine
2-25 Engine Coolant Heater (Option)
2-26 Automatic Transaxle Operation
2-29 Parking Brake
2-30 Shifting Into PARK (P)
2-33 Shifting Out of PARK (P)
2-33 Parking Over Things That Burn
2-34 Engine Exhaust
2-34 Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
2-35 Tilt Wheel
2-36 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
2-43 Exterior Lamps
2-45 Interior Lamps
2-49 Mirrors
2-55 Storage Compartments
2-62 OnStar System (If Equipped)
2-65 Sunroof (Option)
2-66 HomeLink Transmitter (If Equipped)
2-70 The Instrument Panel -- Your
Information System
2-72 Instrument Panel Clusters
2-75 Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
2-86 Driver Information Center (DIC) (If Equipped)
2-96 Head-Up Display (HUD) (If Equipped)
2-99 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) (Option)
2-2
Windows
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows
closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome by
the extreme heat and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never
leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.
2-3
Power Windows
Switches on the driver’s armrest control each of the
windows while the ignition is on or Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See “Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) in the Index for more information. In addition,
each passenger door has a switch for its own window.
Express-Down Window
The switch for the driver’s window has an express-down
feature. Pull the switch back all the way, release it and
the window will lower automatically. To stop the
window from lowering, pull the switch again. To
partially open the window, pull the switch back half
way. When the switch is released, the window will
stop moving. To raise the window, press and hold the
switch forward.
Window Lock
Press the window lock button on the driver’s armrest to
disable all passenger window switches, or just the rear
passenger switches. The middle of the switch will light
to indicate the window lockout is active. The driver’s
window controls will still be operable.
Press the window lock button a second time to allow
passengers to use their window controls again. The light
in the center of the switch will go off to indicate that the
feature is disabled.
If you have the optional DIC, you can choose to lock out
only the rear windows. See “Personal Choice Features”
or “Driver Information Center” in the Index for
programming instructions.
2-4
Keys
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t
leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
Your vehicle has a two-key system. One key is the
master and the other is a valet key.
2-5
The master key is used
for the ignition, as well as
the door lock, trunk and
glove box.
The VALET key is used for
the ignition and the driver’s
door only. It will not open
the trunk or glove box. This
is a theft-deterrent feature.
The VALET key should
always be used when valet
parking your vehicle.
Your vehicle has the PASS-Key III vehicle theft
system. Both the master and VALET key have a
transponder in the key head that matches a decoder in
the vehicle’s steering column. If a replacement key or
any additional key is needed, you must purchase this key
from your dealer. The key will have PK3 stamped on it.
Keep the bar code tag that came with the original keys.
Give this tag to your dealer if you need a new key made.
Any new PASS-Key III key must be programmed before
it will start your vehicle. See “PASS-Key III” in
the Index for more information on programming your
new key.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle has a number of features that can
help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock
your keys inside. You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have
extra keys.
2-6
Door Locks
CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers -- especially children -- can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle won’t open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in
a crash if the doors aren’t locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your door key or remote keyless
entry transmitter.
To lock the door from the inside, move the manual lock
on the door handle forward.
To unlock the door, move the manual lock on the door
handle rearward.
2-7
Central Door Unlocking System
From outside the vehicle, if the driver’s door key is held
in the unlock position for more than two seconds, or if
the key is turned to the unlock position twice within
three seconds, all doors will unlock.
Power Door Locks
With power door locks, you
can lock or unlock all doors
on your vehicle using either
the driver’s or the front
passenger’s power door
lock switch.
Door Ajar Reminder (If Equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
Center (DIC), and a door is not fully closed, the
DIC will display a DOOR AJAR message.
See “Driver Information Center” in the Index.
Automatic Door Locks
Close the doors and turn on the ignition. If all the doors
are closed, every time you move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) all of the doors will lock. And, every time
you stop and move the shift lever into PARK (P), the
doors will unlock. If someone needs to get out while
you’re not in PARK (P), have that person use the manual
or power lock. When the door is closed again, it will not
lock automatically. Just use the manual or power lock to
lock the door again. If you need to lock the doors before
shifting out of PARK (P), just use the manual or power
lock switch to lock the doors.
Customizing Your Automatic Door Locks Feature
You can program the automatic door locks feature to one
of the following modes:
Mode 0: No automatic door lock or unlock.
Mode 1: All doors automatically lock when shifted out
of PARK (P). No automatic door unlock.
Mode 2: All doors automatically lock when shifted out
of PARK (P). Only the driver’s door automatically
unlocks when shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 3: All doors automatically lock when shifted out
of PARK (P). All doors automatically unlock when
shifted into PARK (P).
2-8
Each remote keyless entry transmitter can be programmed
to a different mode according to the user’s preference.
To change modes:
1. Close all the doors and turn the ignition on. Keep all
doors closed throughout this procedure.
2. Press and hold LOCK on the power door lock switch
on the driver’s door through Step 4.
3. Press the button with the lock symbol on the remote
keyless entry transmitter to enter the programming
mode. The automatic door lock mode will remain in
the current mode.
4. Press the button with the lock symbol on the
transmitter again. Each time the button with the lock
symbol is pressed, the mode will advance by one,
going from Mode 3 to Mode 0 to Mode 1, etc.
For each press of the button with the lock symbol,
the door locks will activate in the same manner they
would activate in the corresponding automatic door
lock mode. For example, pressing the button with the
lock symbol on the transmitter to advance to Mode 2
would result in all doors locking and then, only the
driver’s door would unlock. For Mode 0, no locking
or unlocking will occur.
5. Release the power door lock switch and turn the
ignition off. The automatic door locks will remain in
the most recent mode selected.
You can also program the automatic door locks feature
using the Driver Information Center. See “Driver
Information Center Personal Choice Programming” in
the Index.
Delayed Locking
This feature lets the driver delay the actual locking of
the doors. When the power door lock switch or the
remote keyless entry button with the lock symbol is
pressed with the key removed from the ignition and the
driver’s door open, a chime will sound three times to
signal that the lock delay mode is active. When all doors
have been closed, the doors will lock automatically after
five seconds. If any door is opened before this, the
five-second timer will reset itself once all the doors have
been closed again.
Pressing the door lock switch or the remote keyless
entry button with the lock symbol a second time will
override this feature.
2-9
The delayed locking feature can be turned on or off for
each remote keyless entry transmitter.
To turn the feature on do the following:
1. Press and hold LOCK on the power door lock switch
on the door throughout this procedure. All the doors
will lock.
2. Press the button with the unlock symbol on the
transmitter to enter the programming mode. The lock
delay is still off and all doors will remain locked.
3. Press the button with the unlock symbol on the
transmitter again. Lock delay is now active and all
doors will unlock.
4. Release the power door lock switch.
To turn this feature off, repeat the above procedure.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you can also program these features
through the DIC. See “Driver Information Center” in
the Index.
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle is equipped
with rear door security
locks that help prevent
passengers from opening
the rear doors on your
vehicle from the inside.
Using One of These Locks
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. Move the lever on the door all the way up to the
ENGAGED position.
3. Close the door.
4. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use.
2-10
Opening a Rear Door When the Security Lock is On
1. Unlock the door.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults or
older children who ride in the rear won’t be able to open
the rear door from the inside. You should let adults and
older children know how these security locks work, and
how to cancel the security locks.
Canceling the Rear Door Security Lock
1. Unlock the door.
2. Move the lever all the way down.
3. Do the same thing for the other rear door.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
Lockout Protection
The power door locks will not work if the key is left in
the ignition and the driver’s door is open. You can
override this feature by holding the power door lock
switch on the driver’s door for more than three seconds.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your
door and set the locks from inside, then get out and
close the door.
Remote Keyless Entry System
With this feature, you can lock and unlock your doors or
unlock your trunk from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet
(9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter
supplied with your vehicle.
Your remote keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-11
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
Check to determine if battery replacement or
synchronization is necessary. See the instructions
that follow.
If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Operation
The numbers on the back of the transmitters correspond to
DRIVER #1 and DRIVER #2 on the DIC (if equipped).
See “DIC” in the Index for more information.
The driver’s door will
unlock when the button
with the unlock symbol is
pressed. If pressed again
within five seconds, all the
doors will unlock.
Pressing any button will also illuminate the interior lamps
(see “Illuminated Entry” in the Index). All doors will lock
when the button with the lock symbol is pressed.
The trunk will unlock when the trunk button is pressed,
and the ignition is in LOCK or OFF. The trunk button
will also work when the ignition is on, but only while
the transaxle is in PARK (P).
2-12
Instant Alarm
When the button with the horn symbol on the remote
keyless entry transmitter is pressed, the horn will sound
and the headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to
30 seconds. This can be turned off by pressing the
instant alarm button again or by turning the ignition on.
With the content theft-deterrent feature, you may
also turn off the instant alarm by unlocking the vehicle
with a key.
Personal Choice Features
Each remote keyless entry transmitter can be
programmed to the driver’s preference for automatic
door locks, security feedback, delayed locking, memory
seat, perimeter lighting, parallel park assist mirror and
window lockout. See each feature in the Index. You can
also personalize your comfort control temperature, mode
and fan settings. See “Comfort Controls, Personal
Choice” in the Index.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you can also program these features through
the DIC. See “Driver Information Center” in the Index.
Security Feedback
This feature provides feedback to the driver when the
vehicle receives a command from the remote keyless
entry transmitter. The following modes may be selected:
Mode 0: No feedback when locking or
unlocking vehicle.
Mode 1: No feedback when locking; exterior lamps
flash when unlocking vehicle.
Mode 2: Exterior lamps flash when locking; no
feedback when unlocking vehicle.
Mode 3: Exterior lamps flash when locking and when
unlocking vehicle.
Mode 4: Exterior lamps flash and horn chirps when
locking; no feedback when unlocking vehicle.
Mode 5: Exterior lamps flash and horn chirps when
locking; exterior lamps flash when unlocking vehicle.
2-13
Each remote keyless entry transmitter can be
programmed to a different mode according to the user’s
preference. To change to another mode do the following:
1. Press and hold LOCK on the power door lock switch
on the door throughout the procedure.
2. Press the trunk button on the transmitter. The horn
will chirp and the transmitter will remain in its
current mode.
3. Press the trunk button again. Each time the trunk
button is pressed, the horn will chirp and the
transmitter will advance to the next mode.
4. Release the power door lock switch.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you can also program these features
through the DIC. See “Driver Information Center”
in the Index.
Theft-Deterrent System
The remote keyless entry transmitter will arm the
theft-deterrent system whenever the doors are closed
and you push the button with the lock symbol when the
ignition is off. It will disarm the system when you push
the button with the unlock symbol.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you go to your
dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters
matched to it.
See your dealer to match additional transmitters to
your vehicle.
2-14
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch
any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter. For battery replacement, use a Duracell battery,
type DL-2032, or a similar type.
To replace the battery:
1. Insert a thin coin into the notch near the key ring.
Turn the coin counterclockwise to separate the two
halves of the transmitter.
2. Once the transmitter is separated, use a pencil eraser
to remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
2-15
3. Remove and replace the battery as the instructions
under the cover indicate.
4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure
no moisture can enter.
5. Test the operation of the transmitter with your
vehicle. If the transmitter does not work,
resynchronize the transmitter.
Resynchronization
After replacing the battery in your transmitter, or if only
the instant alarm works, the transmitter needs to be
resynchronized to the receiver. Do this by pressing and
holding both the button with the lock symbol and the
button with the unlock symbol at the same time for about
eight seconds. You must be within range of the vehicle.
Once the transmitter has been resynchronized, the
horn will chirp and the exterior lamps will flash once.
The system should now operate properly.
Trunk
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the trunk lid open or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections must
pass through the seal between the body and the
trunk lid:
Make sure all other windows are shut.
Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the setting
on any airflow selection except RECIRC.
That will force outside air into your vehicle.
See “Comfort Controls” in the Index.
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
2-16
Trunk Lock Release
To unlock the trunk from the outside, insert the master
key and turn it.
Remote Trunk Release
Press the TRUNK release button located to the left of
the steering column to release the trunk lid.
The trunk will open if the transaxle is in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) and the trunk release lockout is in the
unlocked position.
The remote keyless entry system will also unlock your
trunk if the ignition is off, or if the ignition is on and the
transaxle is in PARK (P).
Remote Trunk Release Lockout
The remote trunk release lockout button allows you to
secure items in the trunk.
Insert the ignition key into
the trunk release button.
Turn the key one-quarter
turn clockwise to LK then
remove it from the button.
This will disable the trunk release button from opening
the trunk.
Trunk Security Override
The remote keyless entry transmitter will open the
trunk when the ignition is on or off and the vehicle is in
PARK (P), even if the trunk release lockout is activated.
2-17
Trunk Release Handle (If Equipped)
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release handle located
near the trunk latch. This handle will glow following
exposure to light. Pull the release handle up to open the
trunk from the inside.
Trap-Resistant Trunk Kit
To help prevent a child from becoming trapped in your
trunk, you can order a trap-resistant trunk kit from your
dealer. This kit includes:
a modified trunk latch,
a lighted release handle, and
seatback tethers (for vehicles with folding
rear seatbacks).
See your dealer for additional information.
Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help.
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an easy
target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so don’t do it.
With the ignition off and the driver’s door open, you’ll hear a
chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition
and take it with you. Always do this. Your ignition and
transaxle will be locked. And remember to lock the doors.
2-18
Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.
Parking Lots
Even if you park in a lot where someone will be
watching your vehicle, it’s still best to lock it up and
take your keys. But what if you have to leave your
ignition key?
If possible, park in a busy, well-lit area.
Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
trunk or glove box. Be sure to close and lock the
storage area.
Close all windows.
Insert the master key into the trunk release button
and turn it to LK (lock).
Lock the glove box.
Lock all doors except the driver’s.
Give the valet key to the valet. Then take the master
key with you.
Content Theft-Deterrent System
Your vehicle is
equipped with a content
theft-deterrent alarm
system. With this system,
the SECURITY light will
flash as you open the door
(if your ignition is off).
This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent
system. Here’s how to do it:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the
remote keyless entry transmitter. The SECURITY
light should come on and stay on.
3. Close all doors. The SECURITY light should go off
after approximately 30 seconds. The alarm is not
armed until the SECURITY light goes off.
If a door is opened without the key or the remote keyless
entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. Your vehicle’s lamps
will flash and the horn will sound for 30 seconds. The lamps
and horn will then turn off to save battery power.
2-19
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if
you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock
switch with the door open, or with the remote keyless
entry transmitter. You should also remember that you
can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the
alarm has been set off.
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.
Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any other
way will set off the alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door
with your key. You can also turn off the alarm by
pressing the button with the unlock symbol on the
remote keyless entry transmitter. The alarm won’t stop
if you try to unlock a door any other way.
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the driver’s
window and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors using the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the car, close the door and wait for the
SECURITY light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door.
This should set off the alarm.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, but the
vehicle’s lamps flash, check to see if the horn works.
The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see
“Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s lamps do not
flash, the vehicle should be serviced by an authorized
service center.
2-20
PASS-Key III
Your vehicle is equipped
with the PASS-Key III
(Personalized Automotive
Security System)
theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key III is a passive
theft-deterrent system. This
means you don’t have to do
anything different to arm or
disarm the system. It works
when you insert or remove
the key from the ignition.
Your PASS-Key III system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key III uses a radio frequency transponder in the
key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
When the PASS-Key III system senses that someone is
using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s starter
and fuel systems. The starter will not work and fuel will
stop being delivered to the engine. Anyone using a
trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged because of the high number of electrical
key codes.
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not
start and the SECURITY light comes on, the key may
have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off and
try again.
2-21
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse (see “Fuses and
Circuit Breakers” in the Index). If the engine still does
not start with the other key, your vehicle needs service.
If your vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty.
See your dealer who can service the PASS-Key III to
have a new key made.
It is possible for the PASS-Key III decoder to learn the
transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up to
10 additional keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
This procedure is for learning additional keys only.
Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your keys,
only a GM dealer can service PASS-Key III to have new
keys made. To program additional keys you will need
two current driver’s keys (black in color). You add a
step to the following procedure. After Step 2 repeat
Steps 1 and 2 with the second current driver’s key.
Then continue with Step 3.
To program the new key:
1. Insert the current driver’s key (black in color) in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer for service.
2. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF, and
remove the key.
3. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to RUN
within 10 seconds of removing the previous key.
4. The SECURITY light will turn off once the key has
been programmed. It may not be apparent that the
SECURITY light went on due to how quickly the
key is programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the SECURITY light comes
on and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine if
you turn it off. Your PASS-Key III system, however, is
not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key
III system at this time.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key III key, see your
dealer to have a new key made.
2-22
New Vehicle “Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long
run if you follow these guidelines:
Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast or
slow -- for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for
more information.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn it to
five different positions.
ACCESSORY (A): In this position you can operate
your electrical power accessories. Press in the ignition
switch as you turn the top of it toward you.
LOCK (B): This is the only position from which you can
remove the key. This position locks your ignition, steering
wheel and transaxle. It’s a theft-deterrent feature.
2-23
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if
so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the
key hard. But turn the key only with your hand.
Using a tool to force it could break the key or the
ignition switch. If none of this works, then your
vehicle needs service.
OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine but
still turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock the steering
wheel like LOCK and it doesn’t send any electrical power
to the accessories. The instrument panel cluster will remain
powered in OFF to illuminate the gear shift indicator. The
cluster will also activate the parking brake light when the
parking brake is set. Use OFF if you must have your
vehicle in motion while the engine is not running.
RUN (D): This is the position that the switch returns to
after you start your engine and release the ignition key.
This is the position for driving. Even when the engine is
not running, you can use RUN to operate your electrical
power accessories and to display some instrument panel
warning lights.
START (E): This position starts your engine. When the
engine starts, release the ignition key. The switch will
return to RUN for normal driving.
Key Reminder Warning
If you leave your key in the ignition, with the engine off,
you will hear a warning chime when you open the
driver’s door.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
After you turn the ignition off and remove the key, you
will still have electrical power to such accessories as the
radio, sunroof (option) and power windows for up to
10 minutes. Power is stopped if you open a door.
2-24
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle is
moving. If you do, you could damage the
transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid
draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, hold your key in
START for about 10 seconds at a time until your
engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key in START for
about three seconds. If the vehicle starts briefly but
then stops again, do the same thing. This time keep the
pedal down for five or six seconds to clear the extra
gasoline from the engine. After waiting about
15 seconds, repeat the normal starting procedure.
2-25
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
Engine Coolant Heater (Option)
In very cold weather, 0 F (-18 C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store
the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving
engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
2-26
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Your automatic transaxle has a shift lever located on the
steering column.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels.
It’s the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle can’t move easily.
CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If
you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.
2-27
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle shift lock control system. You have to fully
apply your regular brakes before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. If you
cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift
lever -- push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as
you maintain brake application. Then move the shift
lever into the gear you wish. See “Shifting Out of
PARK (P)” in the Index.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle
is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine
doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
CAUTION:
Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or
objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.
NOTICE:
Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out
of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine
racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
2-28
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE ( ): This position is
for normal driving. If you need more power for passing,
and you’re:
Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE ( ).
Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE ( ):
When driving on hilly, winding roads,
When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears, or
When going down a steep hill.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to use
your brakes off and on.
NOTICE:
Don’t drive in SECOND (2) for more than
5 miles (8 km), or at speeds over 55 mph
(88 km/h), or you can damage your transaxle.
Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE ( ) or
THIRD (3) as much as possible.
Don’t shift into SECOND (2) unless you are going
slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can
damage your engine.
2-29
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more
power (but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2).
You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or
mud. If the selector lever is put in FIRST (1), the
transaxle won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is
going slowly enough.
NOTICE:
If your front wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happen if you were stuck in
very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid
object. You could damage your transaxle.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This could overheat and damage the
transaxle. Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P)
to hold your vehicle in position on a hill.
Parking Brake
This vehicle has a PUSH
TO RELEASE parking
brake pedal. To set the
parking brake, hold the
regular brake pedal down
with your right foot. Push
down the parking brake
pedal with your left foot.
Whether the ignition key is in RUN or OFF, the
brake system warning light stays on while the parking
brake is set.
The parking brake uses the brakes on the rear wheels.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down and push the parking brake pedal with your
left foot. This will release the parking brake pedal.
When you lift your left foot, the parking brake pedal
will follow it to the release position.
2-30
If you try to drive approximately 20 feet (6.1 m) with the
parking brake on, the brake light stays on and a continuous
chime sounds until you release the parking brake.
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That part shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
Shifting Into PARK (P)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that
follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
2-31
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) as follows:
Pull the lever toward you.
Move the lever up as far as it will go.
3. Move the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the ignition key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-32
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unless you have to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the
shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever
wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift
into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s
seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in
the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-33
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock control
system. You have to fully apply your regular brake before
you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN.
See “Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application.
Then move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF. Open and close the driver’s
door to turn off RAP.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
Parking Over Things That Burn
CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.
2-34
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
Repairs weren’t done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust.”
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with
CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See “Blizzard” in the Index.
2-35
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling a
trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
Horn
Press on the center area of the steering wheel to
sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt steering wheel allows
you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive.
You can also raise it to the highest level to give your
legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever toward you. Move the steering wheel to a
comfortable position, then release the lever to lock the
wheel in place.
2-36
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers and Washer
Cruise Control
Flash-to-Pass
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up
or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the turn or
lane change.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Head-Up Display (HUD),
an arrow will also appear in the display area to indicate the
direction of the turn or lane change. See “Head-Up
Display (HUD)” in the Index for more information.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.
2-37
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows flash
at twice the normal rate, this may indicate that a signal
bulb may be burned out and other drivers won’t see your
turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index) and for burned-out bulbs.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for
the trailer lamps, the signal indicator will flash even if a
turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the front and rear
turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they are
working. You do not need to add a different flasher.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turn
signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal lever
to the off position.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high to
low, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then release it.
When the high beams are
on, a light on the instrument
panel cluster will also be on.
If your vehicle is equipped
with HUD, this light
will also appear in the
display area.
Flash-to-Pass Feature
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are off.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, but not
so far that you hear a click.
If your headlamps are off or on low beam, your
high-beam headlamps will turn on. They’ll stay on as
long as you hold the lever toward you and the
high-beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster
comes on. Release the lever to turn the high-beam
headlamps off.
2-38
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
marked WIPER.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold
it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will
stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles, hold the
band on MIST longer.
Use the delay position to set the wiper speed for a
long or short delay between wipes. This can be very
useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the
delay time. The closer to LO, the shorter the delay
between wipes.
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away
from you to the LO position. For high-speed wiping,
turn the band further, to HI. To stop the wipers, turn the
band to OFF.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent you
from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid damage,
be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before
using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield, carefully
loosen or thaw them. If your blades become damaged, get
new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clear
away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Rainsense II Wipers (If Equipped)
The moisture sensor is mounted on the interior of the
windshield below the rearview mirror and is used to
automatically operate the wipers. This system operates
by monitoring the amount of moisture build-up on the
windshield. Wipes occur as needed to clear the
windshield depending on the driving conditions and the
sensitivity setting. In light rain or snow, fewer wipes
will occur. In heavy rain or snow, wipes will occur more
frequently. The system will operate in the delay, low
speed and high speed modes. If the system is left on for
long periods of time, occasional wipes may occur
without any moisture on the windshield. This is normal
and indicates that the Rainsense system is active.
The Rainsense system is activated by turning the wiper
control band to one of the five sensitivity levels within
the delay area. The delay position closest to OFF/MIST
is the lowest sensitivity setting, level one. This allows
more rain or snow to collect on the windshield between
wipes. You can increase the sensitivity of the system and
the frequency of wipes by turning the wiper control
band away from you to the higher sensitivity levels.
The highest sensitivity setting, level five, is closest to
the LO position. A single wipe will occur each time you
turn the wiper control band to a higher sensitivity level
to indicate that the sensitivity level has been increased.
2-39
The windshield wipers also remain in a “high park”
position (the wipers are stopped on the windshield and
are not in the normal park position), even when the
ignition is turned off.
NOTICE:
Turn the wiper band to OFF to avoid wiper
damage when going through an automatic
car wash.
The MIST and wash cycles operate as normal and are
not affected by the moisture-sensing function. The
system can be overridden at any time by manually
turning the wiper band to LO or HI speed.
NOTICE:
Do not place stickers or other items on the
exterior glass surface directly in front of the
moisture sensor. Doing this could cause the
moisture sensor to malfunction.
Windshield Washer
At the top of the multifunction lever there is a paddle
with the word PUSH on it. For “programmed”
operation, press and release the paddle. The washer will
provide a measured amount of fluid to the windshield
and the wiper will either stop or return to your original
wiping speed. For “demand” operation, press and hold
the paddle for at least two seconds. Release the paddle
when you have enough fluid and the wipers will either
stop or return to your original wiping speed.
CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
If your vehicle is equipped with a DIC, a WINDSHIELD
WASHER FLUID LOW message will appear on the
display when the vehicle is low on washer fluid.
2-40
Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on
the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control shuts off.
CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So,
don’t use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control.
Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the optional
traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control will automatically disengage. See
“Traction Control System” in the Index. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn
the cruise control back on.
Setting Cruise Control
CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You
could be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switch off until you want to use
cruise control.
2-41
1. Move the cruise control
switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Push in the SET button at the end of the turn signal
lever and release it. The CRUISE light on the
instrument panel cluster will come on.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Resuming a Set Speed
Setting the cruise control at a desired speed and then
applying the brake will end the cruise control function.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch from ON to
R/A (Resume/Accelerate) briefly to reset. This returns
you to your desired preset speed.
Remember, if you hold the switch at R/A, the vehicle
will accelerate until you release the switch or apply the
brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t hold the
switch at R/A.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to go to a higher speed.
Push the button at the end of the lever, then release
the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now
cruise at the higher speed.
Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it there
until you reach a desired speed and then release the
switch. To increase your speed in very small amounts,
briefly move the switch to R/A then release it.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
The accelerate feature will only work after you have set
the cruise control speed by pushing the SET button.
2-42
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
Push in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach a desired lower speed, then release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, push the
button briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll go
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
Step lightly on the brake pedal, or
move the cruise switch to OFF. The CRUISE light
will also go out.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
2-43
Exterior Lamps
Headlamps
This knob controls the
following systems:
Headlamps
Taillamps
Parking Lamps
License Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Interior Courtesy Lamps
Pull the headlamp knob out to the first position to turn
on the parking, license and sidemarker lamps. Pull the
knob out further, to the second position, to turn on the
headlamps. Push the knob all the way back in to turn off
the parking and headlamps.
Lamps On Reminder
If you leave the manual headlamp or parking lamp
switch on, remove the key from the ignition and open
the driver’s door, you will hear a continuous warning
chime. The chime will turn off when the lamps are
turned off.
2-44
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully
functional daytime running lights are required on all
vehicles first sold in Canada.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel monitors
the exterior light level for the operation of DRL and
Twilight Sentinel , so be sure it isn’t covered.
The DRL system will make your high-beam headlamps
come on at reduced brightness in daylight when the
following conditions are met:
The ignition is on,
The headlamp switch is off, and
The transaxle is not in PARK (P).
When DRL are on, only your high-beam headlamps will
be on. The parking lamps, taillamps, sidemarker and
other lamps won’t be on. Your instrument panel won’t
be lit up either.
When it’s dark enough outside, your high-beam
headlamps will change to low-beam headlamps at full
brightness. The other lamps that turn on with your
headlamps will also turn on. When it’s bright enough
outside, the regular lamps will turn off, and your
high-beam headlamps change to the reduced brightness
of DRL.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, shift the
transaxle into PARK (P). The DRL will stay off until
you shift out of PARK (P).
To turn off all exterior lighting at night when you are
parked, turn off the headlamps and slide the Twilight
Sentinel control all the way to the left When released,
the control will return to the Twilight Sentinel minimum
delay position and the lights will turn off.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Cornering Lamps
The cornering lamps are designed to come on when you
signal a turn. This will provide more light for cornering
at night.
2-45
Twilight Sentinel
Twilight Sentinel turns your
headlamps on and off by
sensing how dark it
is outside.
To operate this feature, slide the control to any position
to vary the lamp timeout.
If you move the control all the way to MAX, your lamps
will remain on for three minutes after you turn off your
engine. If you move the control almost all the way in the
other direction, so it’s just on, the lamps will go off
quickly when you turn off your engine. You can set this
delay time from only a few seconds to three minutes.
Light Sensor
Your Twilight Sentinel and Daytime Running Lamps
work with the light sensor on top of the instrument
panel. Don’t cover it up. If you do, it will sense “dark”
and the headlamps will come on.
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Intensity Control
Instrument panel light brightness can be adjusted
by turning the headlamp knob counterclockwise
and clockwise.
Courtesy Lamps
When any door is opened, several lamps go on. They
make it easy for you to enter and leave the car. You can
also turn these lamps on by turning the headlamp knob
clockwise all the way past the normal stop.
Illuminated Entry System
When you open either front door or press the button
with the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter, the lamps inside your vehicle will turn on.
These lamps will turn off after about 40 seconds. These
lamps will also turn off if you start the engine or activate
the power door locks.
2-46
Delayed Entry Lighting
When you open the door, the interior lamps will come
on. When you close the door with the ignition off, the
interior lamps will stay on for 25 seconds or until the
ignition is turned to an on position. Locking the doors
with the power door lock switch will override the
delayed entry lighting feature and the lamps will turn
off right away.
Using the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the
door will not cancel delayed lighting.
Theater Dimming
This feature allows for a three to five-second fade out of
the courtesy lamps instead of immediate turn off.
Delayed Exit Lighting
With this feature, the interior lamps will come on for
25 seconds after you remove the key from the ignition.
This will give you time to find the door handle or
lock switches.
Parade Dimming
This feature prohibits the dimming of your instrument
panel displays during daylight while your headlamps are
on. This feature operates with the light sensor for the
Twilight Sentinel and is fully automatic. When the
light sensor reads darkness outside, you will be able to
dim your instrument panel displays once again.
Perimeter Lighting
When the button with the unlock symbol on the remote
keyless entry transmitter is pressed, the daytime running
lamps, parking lamps and back-up lamps will come on
if it is dark enough outside.
This feature will only be activated when the security
feedback feature is programmed to be in Modes 1, 3 or
5 on the transmitter. Modes 0, 2 and 4 do not respond
with exterior lights flashing when unlocking the vehicle
so perimeter lighting will not be active.
This feature can be programmed on or off for
each transmitter.
2-47
To turn the feature off do the following:
1. Press and hold LOCK on the door lock switch on the
door throughout this procedure. All doors will lock.
2. Press the instant alarm button on the transmitter to
enter the programming mode. Perimeter lighting
remains on at this time and the horn will
chirp two times.
3. Press the instant alarm button on the transmitter
again. Perimeter lighting is disabled and the horn
will chirp one time.
4. Release the door lock switch. The perimeter lighting
feature is now off.
To turn the feature on do the following:
1. Press and hold LOCK on the door lock switch
throughout this procedure. All doors will lock.
2. Press the instant alarm button on the transmitter to
enter the programming mode. Perimeter lighting
remains off at this time and the horn will
chirp one time.
3. Press the instant alarm button on the transmitter
again. Perimeter lighting is now enabled and the
horn will chirp two times.
4. Release the door lock switch. The perimeter lighting
feature is now on.
Perimeter lighting can also be activated through the
optional Driver Information Center (DIC). See
“Personal Choice Features” or “Driver Information
Center” in the Index.
2-48
Front Reading Lamps
These lamps and the interior courtesy lamps will come
on when you open a door. They will turn off when you
turn on the ignition.
To turn on the front seat reading lamps when the doors
are closed, press the button behind the lamp you want
on. Press it again to turn the lamp off.
These lamps work even when the ignition is off.
Rear Reading Lamps
To turn on a rear seat reading lamp, press the switch
above that rear door. To turn off the reading lamp, press
the switch again.
2-49
Trunk Lamp
When you open the trunk to its full open position, a
lamp will come on inside the trunk. This lamp will
automatically turn off when the trunk is closed.
Glove Box Lamp
When you open the glove box, a lamp will come on
inside the glove box. This will automatically turn off
when the glove box is closed.
Battery Rundown Protection
This feature shuts off all lamps that are left on for more
than 10 minutes when the ignition is off. This will keep
your battery from running down.
Mirrors
Inside Manual Day/Night Rearview Mirror
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up or
down and side to side. The day/night adjustment allows
you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the lamps
behind you. Pull the tab forward for daytime use; push it
back for night use.
2-50
Electrochromic Day/Night Rearview Mirror
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have an automatic electrochromic
day/night rearview mirror. Your vehicle’s mirror may
also contain OnStar controls.
This is the on/off button for mirrors equipped with
OnStar controls.
When this feature is turned on, the mirror automatically
changes to reduce glare from headlamps behind you. A
photocell on the mirror senses when it is becoming dark
outside. Another photocell built into the mirror face
senses when headlamps are behind you.
At night, when the glare is too high, the mirror will
gradually darken to reduce glare (this change may take a
few seconds). The mirror will return to its clear daytime
state when the glare is reduced.
Mirror Operation
To turn on the automatic dimming feature, press
AUTO (or the on/off button for mirrors equipped with
OnStar controls). To turn off automatic dimming, press
OFF (or the on/off button for mirrors equipped with
OnStar controls). The indicator light will be illuminated
when this feature is active.
Electrochromic Day/Night Rearview Mirror
with Compass (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have an electrochromic inside
rearview mirror with a compass. Your vehicle’s mirror
may also contain OnStar controls.
This is the on/off button for mirrors equipped with
OnStar controls.
Pressing the MIRROR button (or the on/off button for
mirrors equipped with OnStar controls) located at the
bottom of the mirror, turns the automatic dimming
feature on or off.
The mirror also includes an eight-point compass
display in the upper right corner of the mirror face.
When on, the compass automatically calibrates as the
vehicle is driven.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the
liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
2-51
Mirror Operation
To turn on the automatic dimming feature, press
MIRROR (or press and hold the on/off button for about
three seconds for mirrors equipped with OnStar controls).
To turn off automatic dimming, press MIRROR (or press
and hold the on/off button for about three seconds for
mirrors equipped with OnStar controls) again. The green
indicator light will be illuminated when this feature is
active. The automatic dimming feature will be active each
time the vehicle is started.
Compass Operation
Press COMPASS (or the on/off button for mirrors
equipped with OnStar controls) once to turn the
compass on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass will show two character boxes for
approximately two seconds. After two seconds, the
mirror will display the compass heading.
Compass Calibration
If, after two seconds, the display does not show a compass
heading (“N” for North, for example), there may be a
strong magnetic field interfering with the compass. Such
interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount,
magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item. If the
letter “C” should ever appear in the compass window, the
compass may need calibration.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Mirrors equipped with OnStar controls can be placed in
calibration mode by pressing and holding the on/off
button until a “C” is shown in the compass display.
2-52
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. Compass variance is the difference
between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance,
your compass could give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold COMPASS (or the on/off button for
mirrors equipped with OnStar controls) until a zone
number appears in the display. 3. Once a zone number appears in the display, press the
COMPASS button (or the on/off button for mirrors
equipped with OnStar controls) quickly until the
correct zone number appears in the display. Stop
pressing the button and the mirror will return to
normal operation. If “C” appears in the compass
window, the compass may need calibration. See
“Compass Calibration” explained previously.
2-53
Power Remote Control Mirror
Your vehicle has electric mirror controls located on the
driver’s door armrest.
Move the selector switch below the control pad to choose
the right or left mirror. If you place the switch in the center
position, no movement of the mirror will occur. To adjust
a mirror, press the on arrows located on the control pad in
the direction you want the mirror to go.
Adjust each mirror so you can see some of the side of
your vehicle and the area behind your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with the optional memory
seat and mirrors feature, these mirror positions, along
with the driver’s seat position can be stored in memory.
See “Memory Seat and Mirrors” in the Index.
Parallel Park Assist Mirror (If Equipped)
If you have the DIC feature, the passenger’s outside
rearview mirror also includes a tilt-down feature that
operates when the shift lever is in REVERSE (R).
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R), the
passenger mirror will return to its original position after
a five-second delay. This delay prevents movement of
the mirror if multiple gear transitions (reverse to drive to
reverse) occur during a parallel parking maneuver.
This feature can be programmed on or off through the
personal choice selection menu. See “Driver
Information Center” or “Personal Choice Features”
in the Index for programming instructions.
2-54
Convex Outside Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
Automatic Dimming/Heated Outside
Rearview Mirror (If Equipped)
If you have this feature, the driver’s side outside mirror
will adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you. This
feature is controlled by the on and off settings on the
automatic electrochromic day/night rearview mirror. See
“Automatic Electrochromic Day/Night Rearview
Mirror” earlier in this section.
If you have this feature, the left and right outside mirrors
are also heated when you activate the rear window
defogger. See “Rear Window Defogger” in the Index.
Both outside mirrors can be folded forward or rearward.
In the rearward position, they will fold flush with the
vehicle. This feature is particularly useful in automatic
car washes.
2-55
Storage Compartments
Glove Box
The glove box is located on the instrument panel in front
of the front passenger’s seat. Use the key to lock and
unlock the glove box. To open the glove box, pull the
handle upward until the latch opens.
Garage Door Opener Compartment
The garage door opener storage area is located in the
headliner near the reading lamps. The following chart
and instructions will help you install your garage door
opener in the overhead storage area.
1. Push the extended tab (above the GARAGE button)
or insert a screwdriver between the tab and outer
edge of the cover. The garage door opener cover will
flip down.
2. Remove the square height adapters from the cover.
Refer to the chart to determine the number and
location of the height adapters for your garage door
opener. If your unit does not appear on the chart,
you will have to try different adapter number and
location combinations.
2-56
Your Garage Door Transmitter Vehicle Console Door
Name Model Button Position For
Adapter(s) Number Of
Adapter(s)
MULTIELMAC 3033 1 — —
2 6 3
3 6 3
4 — —
MULTIELMAC 1048 1 4 2
MULTIELMAC 1087 1 5 2
MULTIELMAC 3060 1 6 4
MULTIELMAC 1098 1 5 2
2 7 2
OVERHEAD
OO
1-BTN 223 1 1 OR 10 3
DOOR
OVERHEAD
OO
2-BTN 265 1 10 3
DOOR 2 1 3
OVERHEAD
OO
3-BTN 242 1 10 3
DOOR 2 10 3
3 1 3
OVERHEAD
OO
4-BTN 232 1 10 3
DOOR 2 10 3
3 1 3
4 1 3
PULSAR 921 1 4 3
PULSAR 931 1 4 3
Your Garage Door Transmitter Vehicle Console Door
Name Model Button Position For
Adapter(s) Number Of
Adapter(s)
CHAMBERLAIN G-3684 1 5 4
CRUSADER 1-BUTTON 1 9 3
GENIE AT85P 1 3 3
GENIE AT85 1 5 4
GENIE AT90 1 5 4
GENIE MAT85 1 6 4
GENIE MAT90 1 6 4
GENIE AT285P 1 10 3
2 1 3
GENIE AT95 1 10 3
2 3 3
3 1 3
LIFTMASTER G3446 1 2 3
LIFTMASTER G3456 1 2 3
LINEAR DT2A 1 6 3
2 6 3
LINEAR D22A 1 4 3
LINEAR EK-11/H 1 4 2
LINEAR ET-2 1 6 4
LINEAR D22B 1 6 3
2 6 3
(Continued)
2-57
Your Garage Door Transmitter Vehicle Console Door
Name Model Button Position For
Adapter(s) Number Of
Adapter(s)
PULSAR 832 1 9 3
2 3 3
PULSAR 833 1 9 3
2 3 3
PULSAR 832C 1 4 3
2 3 3
3 1 3
PULSAR 833B 1 5 4
PULSAR PDX-9921 1 4 3
SEARS 9B53738 1 6 4
SEARS 9B53708 1 2 2
SHIMA RT-18 1 4 3
STANLEY 1047 1 5 3
STANLEY 1050 1 6 3
STANLEY 1076 1 6 3
2 6 3
STANLEY 1079 1 6 3
2 6 3
STANLEY 1075 1 6 3
2 6 3
STANLEY 331-1052 1 6 4
Your Garage Door Transmitter Vehicle Console Door
Name Model Button Position For
Adapter(s) Number Of
Adapter(s)
LINEAR DT4 1 10 3
LINEAR DT4 2 8 3
3 3 3
4 1 3
LINEAR D4B 1 10 3
2 8 3
3 3 3
4 1 3
MICOM ESP-T-9R 1 6 3
MICOM ESP-T-9 1 6 3
MULTIELMAC 3010 1 6 3
MULTIELMAC 3089 1 4 3
MULTIELMAC 3070 1 6 4
MULTIELMAC 3032 1 6 3
MULTIELMAC 3032 2 6 3
MULTIELMAC 1054 1 6 3
MULTIELMAC 3034 1 — —
2 6 3
3 6 3
4 — —
2-58
3. Place the height adapters on the proper peg using the
suggested combinations or by lining up the height
adapters and the transmitter button on your garage
door opener.
4. Use the hook and loop fastener found in the storage
area and attach the garage door opener securely
inside the console. Line up the transmitter button
with the height adapters.
5. Close the cover and test the GARAGE button.
If your garage door opener doesn’t work after it is
installed, try another combination.
Front Storage Armrest
Your vehicle may have a fold-down armrest between the
front seats that opens into a storage area. To open it, pull
up on the lever at the front edge. Inside are cupholders
that can be flipped forward for use with the armrest
cover closed. There is also a removable coinholder and a
storage area for cassette tapes and compact discs.
Front Center Console (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have a center console that has
two storage compartments. The front of the console has
two cupholders that can be unfolded for use. In addition
you can flip the center of the console forward to use the
built-in writing surface on top of the lid.
You will also find an auxiliary power outlet located
inside the storage compartment and one on the lower
front edge of the console. These outlets can be used for
accessories requiring electrical power, such as a cellular
phone or fax machine. See “Auxiliary Power Outlets” in
the Index.
The console also contains a removeable coinholder as
well as storage for cassette tapes and compact discs.
2-59
Rear Armrest
Your vehicle’s rear seat armrest contains two
cupholders. To access the cupholders, pull the armrest
down from the rear seatback.
Rear Storage Armrest (If Equipped)
The rear storage armrest contains two cupholders. To
access the cupholders, pull the armrest down from the
rear seatback.
The storage armrest also includes a storage area inside
the armrest. To open it, pull up on the lever at the front
edge of the armrest.
Rear Seat Pass Through
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear storage armrest
with a pass-through feature that allows for trunk access.
Pull the rear armrest down, then push down on the trunk
access panel latch to open the panel. To close, push the
access panel until it latches.
Convenience Net
Your vehicle has a convenience net. You’ll see it just
inside the back wall of the trunk.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can
help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or
quick starts and stops.
The net isn’t for larger, heavier loads. Store them in the
trunk as far forward as you can.
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when
you’re not using it.
2-60
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Front Ashtray
The front ashtray may be removed for cleaning.
To remove, grasp the sides and pull forward.
Rear Ashtray
The rear ashtrays are located on each rear door panel.
To remove the rear ashtray, open the lid and ease the
ashtray upward until the edge can be grasped to pull the
ashtray up and out.
NOTICE:
Don’t put papers or other flammable things
into your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them, causing a
damaging fire.
Cigarette Lighter
There is a cigarette lighter near the front ashtray. To use
it, push it in all the way and let go. When it’s ready, it
will pop back out by itself.
NOTICE:
If you hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while it is heating, it won’t be able to back away
from the heating element when it’s ready. That
can make it overheat, damaging the lighter and
the heating element.
2-61
Sun Visors
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle has illuminated visor vanity mirrors. When
you open the visor vanity mirror by pulling up, the
lamps turn on.
The brightness of the lamps can be adjusted by sliding
the switch. Your vehicle may also have visor vanity
mirrors for the rear seat passengers.
To block out glare, swing down the visors. The larger
sun visor can be removed from the center mount and
moved to the side, while the auxiliary sun visor remains
to block glare from the front.
The front side of the driver’s sun visor also contains a
pocket for map storage.
Auxiliary Power Outlets
Your vehicle may have one or two power outlets
depending on the type of front seat you have. If your
front seat has a fold-down armrest, the power outlet is
located in the center of the front seat below the cushion.
If your vehicle has front bucket seats with a center
console, you will find one outlet inside the storage
compartment and the other on the lower front edge of
the console.
These power outlets can be used to plug in electrical
equipment such as a cellular telephone or CB radio.
Follow the proper installation instructions that are
included with the equipment you install.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible to
the auxiliary power outlet and could result in blown
vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem see
your dealer for additional information on the power
accessory plugs.
2-62
OnStar System (If Equipped)
OnStar is a vehicle communications system that
offers a variety of services and provides a hands-free
communication link between you and the OnStar Center.
A service subscription agreement and fee are required in
order to receive OnStar service. Services are available
24 hours a day, 7 days a week. For more information,
call 1-888-ONSTAR-7 (1-888-667-8277).
OnStar Services Button: Press this button once to
contact an advisor who will be able to assist you with
these services. If you are not quickly connected, the
system will automatically reset and redial. This ensures
connection to the center; there is no additional action
required. Press the Call Answer/End button to cancel the
automatic redial.
Emergency Button: In an emergency situation,
press the emergency service button. Upon receiving the
call, an advisor at the center will locate your vehicle and
assess the situation. If necessary, the advisor will alert
the nearest emergency service provider.
Call ANSWER/END Button: Use this button to
answer a call. (If you are receiving a call, the audio
system will mute, and the ring will be heard). Press this
button at the end of a call to disconnect and return the
audio system to its previous settings. This button will
also cancel a call if one of the buttons is accidentally
pressed or if the automatic redial function is activated.
Volume Control: You can control the volume of the
OnStar System using either the volume control knob on
the radio or using the steering wheel volume control.
Telltale Light: This light will indicate the status of
the system. A solid green light will come on when you
start the vehicle to let you know that the system is on
and is ready to make or receive calls.
If the light blinks green it means that an incoming or
outgoing call is in progress. Press the Call ANSWER/END
button if you notice the light blinking and you are not
on a call.
2-63
The light will be red in the event of an OnStar system
malfunction. If this occurs press the OnStar button to
attempt to contact an advisor. If the connection is made,
the advisor will assist you with steps to take to make
sure that the system is functioning properly. If you
cannot contact the advisor, take your vehicle to your
dealership as soon as possible for assistance.
Safety and Security Services
Automatic Notification of Air Bag
Deployment -- If an air bag deploys, a priority
emergency signal is automatically sent to the center.
An advisor will locate your vehicle’s position, try to
contact you and assist you in the situation. If the
center is unable to contact you, an emergency service
provider will be contacted.
Stolen Vehicle Tracking -- Call the center at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) to report your
vehicle stolen. The system can then locate and track
your vehicle and the advisor will be able to notify
the proper authorities.
Roadside Assistance with Location -- For vehicle
breakdowns, press the OnStar button. An advisor
will contact the appropriate help.
Remote Diagnostics -- If an instrument panel light
comes on, the center can perform a check of the
engine on-board computer. An advisor can then
recommend what action needs to be taken.
OnStar MED-NET -- Med-Net can store your
personal medical history and provide it to emergency
personnel if necessary. (Requires activation and
additional fee.)
Accident Assist -- An advisor can provide
step-by-step guidance following an accident.
Remote Door Unlock -- To contact the center, call
1-888-4-ONSTAR. You will be required to provide
your security information. An advisor will send a
command to your vehicle to unlock itself. The
advisor can delay unlocking your vehicle. Remote
Door Unlock is disabled 48 hours after the vehicle is
parked to maintain the battery charge.
Vehicle Locator Service -- To contact the center,
call 1-888-4-ONSTAR. You will be required to
provide your security information. An advisor will
send a command to your vehicle to sound the horn
and/or flash the lamps.
In order to provide you with excellent service, calls with
the OnStar Center may be monitored or recorded.
2-64
Premium Services (Includes Safety and
Security Services)
Route Support -- An advisor can provide directions
or guidance to anywhere you want to go. In addition,
they can help you locate gas stations, rest areas,
ATMs, hospitals, hotels, stores, eateries and more.
Concierge Services -- The concierge advisor can
obtain tickets, reservations, or help with vacation/trip
planning and other unique items and services.
Ride Assist -- An advisor can locate transportation
in the event that you are unable to drive.
OnStar System Limitations
Complete limitations can be found on the Subscriber
Services Agreement.
OnStar Service is:
Available in the 48 contiguous United States, Alaska,
Hawaii and Canada;
available when the vehicle is within the operating
range of a cellular provider;
subject to limitations caused by atmospheric
conditions, such as severe weather or topographical
conditions, such as mountainous terrain;
subject to cellular carrier equipment limitations.
Global positioning capabilities used to deliver
OnStar Service will not be available if satellite signals
are obstructed.
OnStar will not function if the vehicle’s battery is
discharged or disconnected. It may also be inoperative if
the vehicle is in an accident and the OnStar or vehicle
electrical system components are damaged.
Safety and security services are provided by existing
governmental emergency service providers. OnStar will
use reasonable efforts to contact the appropriate
emergency service provider and request assistance but
cannot promise that they will respond to the call in a
timely manner or at all.
Assist Straps
An assist strap over each rear door and the front
passenger’s door can be used to help you get in or out
of your vehicle.
2-65
Garment Hooks
For your convenience, you will find a two-hanger
capacity garment hook above each rear door near the
reading lamps.
Sunroof (Option)
If you have the
express-open sunroof
option, the switch is on the
headliner between the sun
visors. It will open the
sunroof when in retained
accessory power or when
the ignition is on.
The sunroof switch can be operated in four directions
to control sunroof movement. To open the glass panel
and sunshade, press the switch rearward and release.
The sunroof will open automatically to the full-open
position. To stop the panel in a partially-opened
position, press the switch again at the desired point.
To continue to fully open the sunroof, press the switch
rearward again and release it. The sunshade can also
be opened manually.
To close the glass panel, press and hold the switch
forward. The sunshade must be manually closed.
Once the sunroof is closed, it can be opened to the vent
position. Push the switch upward to vent. To close, pull
the switch downward. The sunshade must be opened and
closed manually for vent operation.
2-66
HomeLink Transmitter
(If Equipped)
This transmitter allows you
to consolidate the functions
of up to three individual
hand-held transmitters.
It will operate garage doors and gates, or other devices
controlled by radio frequency such as home/office
lighting systems.
The transmitter will learn and transmit the frequencies
of most current transmitters and is powered by your
vehicle’s battery and charging system.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-67
Programming the HomeLink Transmitter
Do not use the HomeLink Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
safety feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door you are programming.
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. If you have previously programmed a transmitter
channel, proceed to Step 2. Otherwise, hold down
the two outside buttons on the HomeLink
Transmitter until the indicator light begins to flash
rapidly (after 20 seconds). Then release the buttons.
This procedure initializes the memory and erases any
previous settings for all three channels.
2. Decide which one of the three channels you want to
program. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter
about 2 to 5 inches (5 to 13 cm) away from the
surface of the HomeLink Transmitter so that you can
still see the indicator light.
3. Using both hands, press the hand-held transmitter
button and the desired button on the HomeLink
Transmitter. Continue to press both buttons
through Step 4.
4. Hold down both buttons until you see the indicator
light on the HomeLink Transmitter flash slowly and
then rapidly. The rapid flashing indicates that the
HomeLink Transmitter has been programmed.
Release both buttons once the indicator light starts
to flash rapidly.
2-68
If you have trouble programming the HomeLink
Transmitter, make sure that you have followed the
directions exactly as described. The HomeLink Transmitter
may not work with older garage door openers that do not
meet current Federal Consumer Safety Standards. If you
cannot program the transmitter after repeated attempts,
refer to “Rolling Code Programming” later in this section
or contact the HomeLink Transmitter manufacturer
at 1-800-355-3515.
Be sure to keep the original hand-held transmitter
in case you need to erase and reprogram the
HomeLink Transmitter.
Canadian Owners: During programming, the
hand-held transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting after one or two seconds. In this case, you
should press and re-press the button on the hand-held
transmitter every two seconds without ever releasing the
button on the HomeLink Transmitter. Release both
buttons when the indicator light on the HomeLink
Transmitter begins to flash rapidly.
Operating the HomeLink Transmitter
Press and release the appropriate button on the
HomeLink Transmitter. The indicator light comes on
while the signal is being transmitted.
If the hand-held transmitter appears to program the
HomeLink Transmitter but does not open your garage
door, and if the garage door opener was manufactured
after 1996, the garage door opener may have a “rolling
code” system. A rolling code system changes the code
of the garage door opener every time you open or close
the garage door.
To determine if you have this system, press the button on
the HomeLink Transmitter that you have programmed
already. If the indicator light on the HomeLink Transmitter
flashes rapidly for two seconds and then turns solid, the
garage door opener has a rolling code system. In a rolling
code system, the garage door motor head unit must be
trained to the HomeLink Transmitter.
2-69
“Rolling Code” Programming
If you have not previously programmed the hand-held
transmitter to the HomeLink Transmitter, see
“Programming the HomeLink Transmitter” listed
previously. If you have completed this programming
already, you now need to train the garage door opener
motor head unit to recognize the HomeLink Transmitter.
Refer to your garage door opener owner’s manual for
the proper transmitter training procedure for your garage
door opener brand.
1. Find the training button on the garage door opener
motor head unit. The exact location and color of the
button may vary by garage door opener brand. If you
have difficulty finding the training button, refer to
your garage door opener owner’s manual.
Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to
have another person available to assist in the
programming the transmitter.
2. Press the training button on the garage door opener
motor head unit.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds to
start Step 3.
3. Return to the HomeLink Transmitter in your vehicle
and firmly press and release the HomeLink
Transmitter button you have already programmed for
two to three seconds. Press and release the button
again (you may need to do this step up to three
times) to make sure that the HomeLink Transmitter
has been trained to the garage door opener motor
head unit. Check that the training was successful.
The garage door opener should now recognize the
HomeLink Transmitter. You may either use the
HomeLink Transmitter or the hand-held transmitter to
open the garage door.
If after following these instructions, you still have
problems training the garage door opener, contact the
HomeLink Transmitter manufacturer at 1-800-355-3515.
Erasing Channels
To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the
two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons.
Accessories
Accessories for the HomeLink Transmitter are available
from the manufacturer of the unit. If you would like
additional information, please call 1-800-355-3515.
2-70
The Instrument Panel -- Your Information System
2-71
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlet
B. Headlamps/Parking Lamps Knob
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
D. Steering Wheel Controls
E. Hazard Warning Flashers Button
F. Instrument Panel Cluster
G. Gearshift Lever
H. Audio System
I. Air Outlet
J. Fuel Door Release Button
K. Trunk Release and Lockout Button
L. Hood Release
M. Ignition Switch
N. Traction Control Button
O. Heated Seat Controls
P. Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter
Q. Climate Control System
R. Glove Box
S. Passenger Climate Control
2-72
Instrument Panel Clusters
Your vehicle is equipped with one of the following instrument panel clusters. Your instrument panel cluster is designed to
let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. It includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained on
the following pages. Be sure to read about those that apply to the instrument panel cluster for your vehicle.
Standard Cluster (United States version shown, Canada similar)
2-73
Cluster with Driver Information Center (DIC) (United States version shown, Canada similar)
2-74
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or
kilometers (used in Canada).
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If possible, the new one has to
be set to the same reading the old one had. If it can’t be,
then it’s set at zero and a label must be put on the
driver’s door to show the old mileage reading and when
the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
A trip odometer can tell how far you’ve driven since
you last set it back to zero. To reset it, push the
RESET button. The trip odometer is reset through the
Driver Information Center (DIC) if your vehicle is
equipped with this feature.
Tachometer
The tachometer tells you
how fast the engine is
running. It displays engine
speed in thousands
of revolutions
per minute (rpm).
NOTICE:
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in
the red area, or engine damage may occur.
2-75
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information Center
(DIC) that works along with the warning lights and
gages. See “Driver Information Center” in the Index.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN, a chime will come on for
about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for about 20 seconds, then
it will flash for about
55 seconds.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
2-76
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks the
air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system
check includes the air bag sensors, the air bag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the air bag system, see
“Air Bag” in the Index.
This light will come on
when you start your vehicle,
and it will flash for a few
seconds. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the air bag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
2-77
Battery Warning Light
When you turn the key to
RUN, this light will come
on briefly, to show the
battery charging system
is working.
When the light goes off and stays off, the charging
system is working.
If the light stays on, a chime will sound indicating you
need service, and you should take your vehicle to the
dealer at once. To save your battery until you get there,
turn off all accessories and turn off your climate
control system.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
This light should come on
when you turn the key to
RUN. If it doesn’t come on
then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if
there’s a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. See “Towing Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
2-78
CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake. The
light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If you try to drive off with the parking brake set, a
chime will also come on until you release the parking
brake. If the light stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, the light(s) will
come on when your engine
is started and may stay on
for several seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light stays on and the chime sounds, turn the ignition
to OFF. Or, if the light comes on and the chime sounds
when you’re driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the
ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the
system. If the light still stays on and the chime sounds, or
the light comes on again while you’re driving, your
vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning
light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have
anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light
is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a
problem with your regular brakes. See “Brake System
Warning Light” earlier in this section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
2-79
Traction Control System Warning
Light (Option)
This warning light should
come on briefly when the
engine is started.
If the warning light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
If it stays on, or comes on when you’re driving, there
may be a problem with your traction control system and
your vehicle may need service. When this warning light
is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
The traction control system warning light may come on
for the following reasons:
If you turn the system off by pressing the button
located on the end of the shift lever, the warning
light will come on and stay on. To turn the system
back on, press the button again. The warning light
should go off. See “Traction Control System” in the
Index for more information.
If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically
related to traction control, the traction control system
will turn off, the warning light will come on and the
chime will sound.
If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn
off, the warning light will come on and the
chime will sound.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
2-80
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage measures the
temperature of the vehicle’s
engine. If the pointer moves
into the red area, the engine
is too hot. A temperature
indicator light will turn on
and a chime will sound.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, and the temperature indicator light
comes on, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light)
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service
is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent. This may
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This
system is also designed to assist your service technician
in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
2-81
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
NOTICE:
Modifications made to the engine, transaxle,
exhaust, intake or fuel system of your vehicle or
the replacement of the original tires with other
than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria
(TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls
and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON
light to come on. Modifications to these systems
could lead to costly repairs not covered by your
warranty. This may also result in a failure to pass
a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
Reducing vehicle speed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
2-82
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see
“If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been
left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel
cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A
few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
“Fuel” in the Index. Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration
or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go
away once the engine is warmed up.) This will be detected
by the system and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
2-83
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or may
begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could
prevent you from getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know in order to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
SERVICE ENGINE SOON light is on or not
working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that
critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would
be considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is designed
to evaluate critical emission control systems during
normal driving. This may take several days of routine
driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still does
not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system
readiness, see your dealer or qualified service center to
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Light
This light tells you if there
could be a problem with
your vehicle’s engine
oil pressure.
The oil pressure light can come on briefly when you
turn your key to RUN. It goes off once you turn the key
to START. That’s just a check to be sure the light works.
This is normal and doesn’t show a problem. If it doesn’t
come on and then go off, be sure to have it fixed so it
will be there to warn you if there is a problem.
When this light comes on and stays on, and a chime
sounds, it means oil isn’t going through the engine
properly. The oil could be low, or there might be some
other oil problem. See your dealer for service.
2-84
CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.
Service Vehicle Soon Light
This light will come on if
your vehicle has certain
non-emission
related problems.
For example, if the entire electrical system fails to send
and receive messages from the vehicle’s components,
the SERVICE VEHICLE SOON warning light
comes on.
These problems may not be obvious and may affect
vehicle performance or durability. Consult a qualified
dealership for necessary repairs to maintain top vehicle
performance. This light will come on briefly when the
ignition is turned on to show that it is working properly.
2-85
Security Light
Your vehicle is
equipped with a content
theft-deterrent alarm
system. With this system,
the SECURITY light will
flash as you open the door
(if your ignition is off).
For more information see “Content Theft-Deterrent” in
the Index.
Cruise Light
The CRUISE light comes
on when you set the
vehicle’s cruise control.
See “Cruise Control” in
the Index.
Fuel Gage
United States Canada
The fuel gage shows about how much fuel is in your
tank. It works only when the ignition is on.
When the indicator moves to the edge of the low fuel
warning band, the low fuel warning light will come on
and a chime will sound. You still have a little fuel left,
but you need to get more fuel right away.
A concern owners have about the fuel gage is that it
takes more (or less) fuel to fill up than the gage
indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated
half full, but it took more (or less) than half the tank’s
capacity to fill it. This situation is normal and indicates
nothing wrong with the fuel gage.
2-86
Driver Information Center (DIC)
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Driver Information
Center (DIC). The DIC will display information about
how your vehicle is functioning, as well as warning
messages if a system problem is detected.
The following buttons are
on the DIC control panel
which is located to the left
of the steering column:
ODO/TRIP: Use this button to display your total and
trip miles.
FUEL INFO: Press this button to display fuel
information such as fuel used, fuel range and
fuel economy.
GAGE INFO: Use this button to display oil pressure,
oil life, coolant temperature, tire pressure and
battery information.
RESET: This button, used along with other buttons,
will reset system functions.
ENG/MET: Use this button to change the display
between English and metric units.
DIC Controls and Displays
There are two lines in the DIC display. The bottom line on
the display area is left blank when the DIC displays the
driver number identified when entering the vehicle. You
can have your dealer program your name to appear on this
display line. See your dealer for more information.
When you turn the ignition on, the DIC will display your
DRIVER NUMBER. The system will then perform a status
check and display any messages if a problem is detected.
If there are no problems detected, the display will return
to the mode selected by that driver the last time the
ignition was turned off.
2-87
If a problem is detected, a diagnostic message will
appear in the display. The following pages will show the
messages you may see on the DIC display.
The message center is continuously updated with the
vehicle’s performance status.
ODO/TRIP
When this button is pressed, the display will show the
total mileage, and TRIP 1 or TRIP 2 miles. TRIP 1 and
TRIP 2 will display the miles traveled since the last
reset. To reset the trip odometer, press the ODO/TRIP
button until the trip miles are shown in the DIC display,
then press the RESET button. The trip odometer will
now accumulate miles until the next reset.
FUEL INFO
Fuel Used: Press the FUEL INFO button until the
display shows FUEL USED. This display will show you
how much fuel has been used since the last reset. To
learn how much fuel is used from a new starting point,
press the RESET button while the fuel used is displayed
in the DIC.
Fuel Range: Press the FUEL INFO button until the
display shows FUEL RANGE. The fuel range will
calculate the remaining distance you can drive without
refueling. This calculation is based on the average fuel
economy for the last 25 miles (40.25 km) driven, and
the fuel remaining in the fuel tank. The RESET button
does not function in this mode.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy: Press the FUEL INFO
button until the display shows FUEL ECONOMY INST.
Instantaneous fuel economy varies with your driving
conditions, such as acceleration, braking and the grade
of the road being traveled. The RESET button does not
function in this mode.
Average Fuel Economy: Press the FUEL INFO button
until the display shows FUEL ECONOMY AVERAGE.
Average fuel economy is viewed as a long term
approximation of your overall driving conditions.
To learn the average fuel economy from a new starting
point, press the RESET button while the average fuel
economy is displayed in the DIC.
2-88
GAGE INFO
Coolant Temperature: Press the GAGE INFO button
until COOLANT TEMP appears in the display. If there
are no problems detected with the temperature,
COOLANT TEMP NORMAL will appear in the
display. If the temperature is too high, COOLANT
TEMP HOT will appear in the display. If you see the
COOLANT TEMP HOT message, your engine is
overheated. You should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off your engine as soon as possible.
This manual explains what to do. See “Engine
Overheating” in the Index.
Tire Pressure: Press the GAGE INFO button until TIRE
PRESSURE appears in the display. TIRE PRESSURE
NORMAL is displayed when the Check Tire Pressure
System believes your vehicle’s tire pressures are normal.
If a potential tire pressure problem is detected, the display
will show TIRE PRESSURE LOW.
Battery Volts: Press the GAGE INFO button until the
display shows BATTERY STATE. If the voltage is
normal the display will show BATTERY STATE
NORMAL. If the voltage drops below 10.5 volts, the
display will show BATTERY STATE LOW. If the
voltage is above 16 volts, the display will show
BATTERY STATE HIGH. If the display shows the high
or low message, you need to have your battery checked.
Oil Pressure: Press the GAGE INFO button until
OIL PRESSURE appears in the display. If there are no
problems detected with the oil pressure, the display will
show OIL PRESSURE NORMAL. If a low oil pressure
condition is detected, the display will show OIL
PRESSURE LOW. If you see the OIL PRESSURE
LOW message, you could be low on oil or your oil is
not going through the engine properly. See your dealer
for service.
Oil Life System: Press the GAGE INFO button until
OIL LIFE INDEX appears in the display. The OIL LIFE
INDEX NORMAL display will show an estimate of the
oil’s remaining useful life. When the oil life index is less
than 10%, the display will show OIL LIFE INDEX
CHANGE OIL. When you have the oil changed, you
will have to reset the GM Oil Life System . To reset
the Oil Life System, see “Engine Oil Life System” or
“Engine Oil, When to Change” in the Index.
2-89
DIC Warnings and Messages
Other messages or warnings may appear in the
DIC display. For Canadian drivers, in addition to the
DIC message your DIC will display EXP with a number
after it which reflects the following messages:
EXP (Export ID) Warning Message
23 DOOR AJAR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24 TRUNK AJAR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25 WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID LOW. . . . . . . .
36 ENGINE OIL LOW - CHECK LEVEL. . . . . . . . .
54 SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . .
55 STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82 CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91 TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM ACTIVE. . . .
140 TIRE PRESSURE LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The EXP codes are used to make translation from
English to other languages easier.
Pressing any of the DIC control buttons will remove the
messages or warnings from the DIC display.
SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM - 54: If you ever
see the SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM message, it
means there may be a problem with your stability
enhancement system. If you see this message, try to
reset the system (stop; turn off the engine; then start the
engine again). If the SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM
message still comes on, it means there is a problem. You
should see your dealer for service. Reduce your speed
and drive accordingly.
STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE - 55: You may see
the STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE message on the
Driver Information Center. It means that an advanced,
computer-controlled system has come on to help your
vehicle continue to go in the direction in which you’re
steering. This stability enhancement system activates
when the computer senses that your vehicle is just
starting to spin, as it might if you hit a patch of ice or
other slippery spot on the road. When the system is on,
you may hear a noise or feel a vibration in the brake
pedal. This is normal.
2-90
When the STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE message is
on, you should continue to steer in the direction you
want to go. The system is designed to help you in bad
weather or other difficult driving situations by making
the most of whatever road conditions will permit. If the
STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE message comes on,
you’ll know that something has caused your vehicle to
start to spin, so you should consider slowing down.
Tire Pressure Status - 140: If you see the TIRE
PRESSURE LOW message, you should stop as soon as
you can and check all your tires for damage. (If a tire is
flat, see “If a Tire Goes Flat” in the Index.) Also check
the tire pressure in all four tires as soon as you can. See
“Inflation - Tire Pressure” and “Check Tire Pressure
System” in the Index.
There are times when you will have to reset (calibrate)
the Check Tire Pressure System. See “Check Tire
Pressure System” in the Index.
DIC Personal Choice Programming
The DIC is used to program the personal choices of
two drivers. The drivers are recognized as DRIVER #1
and DRIVER #2. The DIC will identify a person as
UNKNOWN DRIVER if they are neither DRIVER #1
nor DRIVER #2. You will let the DIC know which
driver you are by using your remote keyless entry
transmitter or by pressing one of the MEMORY buttons
located on the driver’s door. Each remote keyless entry
transmitter was pre-programmed to belong to
DRIVER #1 or DRIVER #2. Each transmitter
may be programmed differently for each driver.
After you press the button with the unlock symbol on
your transmitter with the ignition in RUN, the DIC will
automatically display the identified driver number. The
vehicle will recall the personal choice settings that were
last made to correspond to your transmitter, including
your radio and comfort control settings. See “Comfort
Controls, Personal Choice” in the Index.
2-91
If you unlock the vehicle using your door key instead of
your transmitter, the DIC will not change drivers and
will recall the information from the last transmitter used
or the last driver using one of the MEMORY buttons.
If this happens and you were not the last driver of the
vehicle, simply press your correct driver number on the
appropriate MEMORY button or press the button with
the unlock symbol on your transmitter.
The DIC can be used to program the following personal
choice features available with your vehicle:
Memory Seats
Automatic Door Locks
Security Feedback
Delayed Locking
Perimeter Lighting
Parallel Park Assist Mirror
Window Lockout
See “Personal Choice Features” in the Index.
See the following steps for personal choice
programming instructions.
1. Turn the ignition on and keep the transaxle
in PARK (P).
2. Inform the DIC which driver you are by pressing the
button with the unlock symbol on your transmitter or
the appropriate memory seat control.
3. Press and hold the ENG/MET button for five
seconds. WELCOME TO BUICK OPTION
FEATURE will appear in the display.
The next display will be your driver number and the
message ARMREST BUTTON CHANGES
DRIVER #. Follow the instructions in the display.
You are now in the selection mode and the DIC is
ready to program your personal choices in memory.
The selections you make for the personal choice
features will be saved after the display reads
FEATURE OPTION SELECTION DONE.
Each feature that can be personalized will appear in
the display. Once you have made a selection for a
feature, the DIC will move on to the next personal
choice feature.
2-92
4. Scroll through the following messages and
feature options:
PARALLEL PARK - OFF/ON
AUTO DOOR LOCKS - OFF/ON
UNLOCK IN PARK - OFF/ON
WHICH DOORS - ALL/DRIVER
DELAYED LOCKING - OFF/ON
LOCK FEEDBACK - OFF/ON
LOCK FEEDBACK - LIGHTS/
LIGHTS + HORN
UNLOCK FEEDBACK - OFF/LIGHTS
PERIMETER LIGHTS - OFF/ON
SEAT RECALL - OFF/ON
RECALL POSITION - MEMORY/EXIT
WINDOW LOCKOUT - ALL PASS/REAR
If you would like to exit the selection mode without
moving through each of the personal choice features,
simply press a different button on the DIC or turn off the
ignition. However, personal choices you made may not
be retained.
If you happen to move past a selection you would like to
make a personal choice for, press the button with the
unlock symbol on your transmitter or press the
appropriate driver number on the seat control. This will
return you to the beginning of the option feature
programming mode.
A description of each feature programmable through the
DIC follows.
Parallel Park Assist
The parallel park assist mirror, which tilts the passenger
mirror while the vehicle is in REVERSE (R), can be
made active or inactive through the DIC. When
PARALLEL PARK-OFF-ON appears on the display,
use the ENG/MET button to toggle the arrow between
OFF and ON. When you have made your choice, press
the RESET button to record your selection. For more
information on this feature, see “Mirrors” in the Index.
2-93
Automatic Door Locks
The automatic door lock modes, when shifting in and
out of PARK (P), can be changed through the DIC. You
can change these modes using different selections from
the following DIC displays:
AUTO DOOR LOCKS - OFF/ON
UNLOCK IN PARK - OFF/ON
If you choose OFF for AUTO DOOR LOCKS,
your door locks will operate normally with no
automatic feature.
If you choose ON for AUTO DOOR LOCKS, and
ON for UNLOCK IN PARK, your doors will lock every
time you shift out of PARK (P), and the doors will
unlock every time you stop and shift into PARK (P).
If you choose ON for AUTO DOOR LOCKS, and
OFF for UNLOCK IN PARK, your door locks will lock
every time you shift out of PARK (P), and there will
be no automatic door unlock when shifting back
into PARK (P).
When you choose ON for UNLOCK in PARK, the
DIC will display WHICH DOORS - ALL/DRIVER.
You have the choice of unlocking all doors, or just the
driver’s door.
To change modes, do the following:
1. Move the arrow on the display between ON and
OFF by pressing the ENG/MET button.
2. Once you have made your selection, press the
RESET button and your choice will be retained
in memory.
See “Automatic Door Locks” in the Index for more
information about this feature.
Delayed Locking
The delayed locking feature, which delays the
actual locking of the vehicle, can be made active or
inactive through the DIC. When DELAYED
LOCKING - OFF - ON appears on the display, use
the ENG/MET button to toggle the arrow between
OFF and ON. When you have made your choice, press
the RESET button to record your selection.
For more information on this feature, see
“Delayed Locking” in the Index.
2-94
Security Feedback
By choosing different combinations of these selections,
you can choose the type of transmitter activated
feedback when locking and unlocking your vehicle with
your transmitter. Each time you make a selection by
pressing the ENG/MET button, press the RESET button
to record your choice.
LOCK FEEDBACK - OFF/ON
LOCK FEEDBACK - LIGHTS/LIGHTS + HORN
UNLOCK FEEDBACK - OFF/LIGHTS
If you choose ON for LOCK FEEDBACK you will also
need to choose LIGHTS or LIGHTS + HORN.
You can select the following modes:
If you choose OFF for LOCK FEEDBACK and OFF for
UNLOCK FEEDBACK, you will receive no security
feedback when locking or unlocking your vehicle.
If you choose OFF for LOCK FEEDBACK and
LIGHTS for UNLOCK FEEDBACK, you will
receive no security feedback when locking your
vehicle and the exterior lamps will flash when
unlocking your vehicle.
If you choose LIGHTS for LOCK FEEDBACK and
OFF for UNLOCK FEEDBACK, your exterior
lamps will flash when locking your vehicle and you
will receive no security feedback when unlocking
your vehicle.
If you choose LIGHTS for LOCK FEEDBACK and
LIGHTS for UNLOCK FEEDBACK, your exterior
lamps will flash when locking and when unlocking
your vehicle.
If you choose LIGHTS + HORN for LOCK
FEEDBACK and OFF for UNLOCK FEEDBACK,
your exterior lamps will flash and the horn will chirp
when locking your vehicle and you will receive no
security feedback when unlocking your vehicle.
If you choose LIGHTS + HORN for LOCK
FEEDBACK and LIGHTS for UNLOCK
FEEDBACK, your exterior lamps will flash and the
horn will chirp when locking your vehicle and your
exterior lamps will flash when unlocking your vehicle.
For more information on this feature, see “Security
Feedback” in the Index.
2-95
Perimeter Lighting
When the button with the unlock symbol on the
transmitter is pressed, the DRL lamps (high-beams at
reduced intensity), parking lamps and back-up lamps
will turn on if it is dark enough according to the
Twilight Sentinel .
You can control activation of this feature by choosing
OFF or ON when the PERIMETER LIGHTS choice is
displayed on the DIC. Make your choice by pressing the
ENG/MET button and record your choice by pressing
the RESET button.
If you want to choose PERIMETER LIGHTS ON, you
must also choose LIGHTS for UNLOCK FEEDBACK
while making the security feedback choices.
For more information on this feature, see “Perimeter
Lighting” in the Index.
Memory Seat Recall
This feature recalls the position of your seat. When this
feature is active, the memory seat and mirror positions
will be recalled for the identified driver when the remote
keyless entry transmitter is used to enter the vehicle.
You can program this feature to be active by choosing
ON when the SEAT RECALL choice appears, or
inactive by choosing OFF when the SEAT RECALL
choice appears on the DIC.
You can also program this feature to recall your memory
seat position or the exit seat position.
Memory Position: Choose ON when the SEAT
RECALL choice appears, and then choose MEMORY
when the RECALL POSITION choice appears.
Exit Position: Choose ON when the SEAT RECALL
choice appears, then choose EXIT when the
RECALL POSITION choice appears and your seat
will move to the stored exit position. The seat will
also move when you enter the vehicle after
unlocking it with a remote keyless entry transmitter.
This will allow for easy entry as well.
For more information on this feature, see “Memory
Seats” in the Index.
2-96
Window Lockout
The number of passenger windows locked out by
the WINDOW LOCK button can be programmed
through the DIC.
If you choose ALL PASS, all three passenger window
switches will be inactive when the WINDOW LOCK
button is enabled.
If you choose REAR, only the two rear passenger
window switches will be locked out when the
WINDOW LOCK button is enabled.
To change modes do the following:
1. Move the arrow on the display between ALL PASS
and REAR by pressing the ENG/MET button.
2. Once you have made your selection, press the
RESET button. Your choice will be retained in memory.
For more information on this feature, see “Window
Lock” in the Index.
Head-Up Display (HUD)
(If Equipped)
CAUTION:
If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in
your field of view, it may take you more time to
see things you need to see when it’s dark outside.
Be sure to keep the HUD image dim and placed
low in your field of view.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Head-Up Display
(HUD), you can see some of the driver information that
appears on your instrument panel cluster.
The information may be displayed in English or metric
units and appears as a reflection in the windshield. The
HUD consists of the following information:
Speedometer Reading
Turn Signal Indicators
High-Beam Headlamp Indicator
CHECK GAGES Message
2-97
The HUD shows these images when they are lighted on
the instrument panel cluster.
Be sure to continue scanning your displays, controls and
driving environment just as you would in a vehicle
without HUD. If you never look at your instrument
panel, you may not see something important, such as a
warning light.
NOTICE:
Although the HUD image appears to be near the
front of the vehicle, do not use it as a parking aid.
The HUD was not designed for that purpose. If
you try to use the display as a marker for the
front of your vehicle, such as in a parking lot, you
may misjudge distance and hit an obstacle or
another vehicle.
2-98
The HUD controls
are located in the
overhead console.
1. Start your engine and slide the HUD dimmer control
all the way up.
The brightness of the HUD image is determined by
whether the headlamps are on or off, and where you
have the HUD dimmer control set.
2. Adjust the seat to your driving position. Slide the
image height adjuster control all the way up, raising
the image as far as possible.
3. Now slide the image height adjuster control down so
the image is as low as possible but still in full view.
4. Slide the dimmer control downward until the HUD
image is no brighter than necessary.
To turn the HUD display off, slide the dimmer control
all the way down.
If the sun comes out, the sky becomes cloudy, or if you
turn your headlamps on, you may need to adjust the
HUD brightness using the dimmer control. Polarized
sunglasses could make the HUD image harder to see.
To change the display from English to metric units,
push the ENG/MET button located to the left of the
steering column.
Care of the HUD
Clean the inside of the windshield as necessary to
remove any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or
clarity of the HUD image.
To clean the HUD lens, spray household glass cleaner
on a soft, clean cloth. Gently wipe and dry the HUD
lens. Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens to avoid
cleaner leaking inside the unit.
2-99
If You Can’t See The HUD Image When the
Ignition is On
If the ignition is on and you can’t see the HUD image,
check to see if:
The headlamps are on.
Something is covering the HUD unit.
The HUD dimmer control is adjusted properly.
The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height.
A fuse is blown. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in
the Index.
Keep in mind that your windshield is part of the
HUD system. If you ever have to have your windshield
replaced, be sure to get one that is designed for HUD or
your HUD image may look blurred or out of focus.
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) (Option)
Ultrasonic rear parking assist can help you to determine
how close an object is to your rear bumper within a
given area, making parking easier.
The URPA display is located inside the vehicle, above
the rear window. It has three color-coded lights that can
be seen through the rearview mirror.
How the System Works
Ultrasonic rear parking assist comes on automatically
when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R) and
the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h). When the
system comes on, the three lights on the display will
illuminate to let you know that the system is working.
URPA senses how close your vehicle is to an object. The
distance is determined by the four rear sensors located
on the bumper. When shifting into REVERSE (R) and
an object is detected, one of the following will occur:
2-100
A chime will sound the first time an object is
detected, if the object is between 20 inches (0.5 m) and
5 feet (1.5 m) away.
URPA can detect objects 3 inches (7.6 cm) and wider,
and at least 10 inches (2.5 cm) tall, but cannot detect
objects that are above trunk level. In order for the rear
sensors to recognize an object, it must be within
operating range.
If the URPA system is not functioning properly, the
display will flash red, indicating that there is a problem.
The light will also flash red when you are driving if a
trailer is attached to your vehicle, or if you have a
bicycle or an object hanging out of your trunk. The light
will continue to flash until the trailer or the object is
removed and your vehicle is driven forward at least
15 mph (25 km/h).
It may also flash red if the ultrasonic sensors are not
kept clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of
mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush or the system may not
work properly. If after cleaning the rear bumper and
then driving at least 15 mph (25 km/h), the display
continues to flash red, see your dealer. It may also flash
red if your vehicle is moving in REVERSE (R) at a
speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h). Other conditions that
may affect system performance include things like, the
vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of
airbrakes on a very large truck.
As always, drivers should use care when backing up a
vehicle. Always look behind you, being sure to check for
other vehicles, obstructions and blind spots. For cleaning
instructions, see “Cleaning Your Vehicle” in the Index.
3- 3-1
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle.
Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2 Comfort Controls
3-2 Personal Choice Comfort Controls
(If Equipped)
3-2 Dual Automatic ComforTemp
Climate Control
3-6 Air Conditioning
3-6 Heating
3-6 Defogging and Defrosting
3-6 Rear Window Defogger
3-7 Passenger Climate Control
3-8 Ventilation System
3-9 Steering Wheel Controls for Climate Control
3-9 Audio Systems
3-9 Setting the Clock
3-10 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
3-14 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player with Automatic Tone
Control (If Equipped)
3-19 Trunk-Mounted CD Changer (Option)
3-22 Personal Choice Radio Controls (If Equipped)
3-23 Theft-Deterrent Feature
3-25 Audio Steering Wheel Controls
3-25 Understanding Radio Reception
3-26 Tips About Your Audio System
3-27 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
3-28 Care of Your Compact Discs
3-28 Care of Your Compact Disc Player
3-28 Heated Backlite Antenna
3-2
Comfort Controls
This section tells you how to operate your
comfort controls.
With these systems, you can control the heating,
cooling and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehicle
also has a flow-through ventilation system described
later in this section.
Personal Choice Comfort Controls
(If Equipped)
This feature allows two different drivers to store and
recall their own climate control settings for temperature,
air delivery mode, fan and passenger climate control
(on/off) status. The personal choice settings recalled are
determined by the transmitter used to enter the vehicle.
After the button with the unlock symbol on a remote
keyless entry transmitter is pressed, and the ignition is in
RUN, the climate control will adjust to the last settings
of the identified driver. The settings can also be changed
by pressing one of the MEMORY buttons (1 or 2)
located on the driver’s door, until you hear two beeps.
When adjustments are made, the new settings are
automatically saved for that driver.
Dual Automatic ComforTemp
Climate Control
Your vehicle has the dual automatic ComforTemp
climate control system. The following information tells
you how it works.
You will hear a beep each time a button is pushed and a
small light on the button will indicate which buttons are
active. The lights are on all buttons except TEMP, FAN
and AIR FLOW. The display will show fan speed,
comfort level setting and airflow direction for a few
seconds whenever any button, except for rear defog, is
pushed, and then it will display the outside temperature.
The outside temperature reading is most accurate when
the vehicle is moving.
3-3
During stops, when driving slow, or when the engine is
first started after a short trip, the outside temperature
reading can be affected by road or engine heat. Also,
starting the engine within a short time after the vehicle
has been running will affect the reading. To ensure
proper automatic climate control operation, the outside
temperature display may not update as quickly
as expected.
Sun and temperature sensors automatically adjust the air
temperature, the airflow direction and the fan speed to
maintain your comfort setting. The system may supply
cooler air to the side toward the sun. Be careful not to
put anything over the sensors on top of the dash.
Temperature Button
To adjust the comfort level you want maintained inside
the vehicle, push the TEMP button. If you want a
warmer comfort level, push the red arrow. If you want a
cooler comfort level, push the blue arrow. Your comfort
setting is shown in the display.
Fan Button
The speed of the blower fan is controlled automatically
if you have the system set for AUTO. Pressing the
FAN button will display and hold the current blower
fan setting.
If you want the blower fan to run at a lower speed, push
the bottom of the FAN button. The fan speed will
decrease with every push of the button until the lowest
speed is reached. If you want to increase the fan speed,
push the top of the FAN button. Notice the fan
indicators on the display.
Mode Controls
Press the AIR FLOW button to deliver air through the
floor, middle or windshield outlets. The system will stay
in the selected mode until the AUTO button is pushed.
Press the up or down arrow on the AIR FLOW button
to cycle through the available modes.
3-4
Automatic Operation
Press the AUTO button when you want the system to
automatically adjust to changes in the temperature.
When the system is set for automatic operation, air will
come from the floor, middle or windshield outlets
depending on the temperature inside the vehicle, the
outside temperature and sun load. Fan speed will vary as
the system gets to and maintains the comfort setting you
have selected through the use of the TEMP button.
To find your comfort setting, start with the system in
AUTO mode and the TEMP button adjusted to a display
of 75 F (24 C), give the vehicle about 20 minutes to
stabilize, and adjust your comfort setting if necessary, by
using the TEMP button. The display will show the
comfort setting, fan speed and airflow direction for a
few seconds, and then it will display the outside
temperature. If you choose the temperature setting of
60 F (15 C), the system will remain at the maximum
cooling setting and fan speed. If you choose the
temperature setting of 90 F (33 C), the system will
remain at the maximum heat setting and fan speed.
Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the
system to heat or cool any faster.
In cold weather, the system will delay turning the fan on
high, to avoid blowing cold air. The length of the delay
depends on the engine coolant temperature and the
outside temperature. Pushing the FAN, AIR FLOW or
FRONT buttons will override this delay, turn off the
AUTO setting and change the fan speed.
Manual Operation
You may also manually adjust the air delivery or
fan speed.
AIR FLOW: This button is used to change the direction
of the airflow. The airflow choices available are FLOOR,
FLOOR-MID, MID and WINDSHIELD-FLOOR.
If the system is set for AUTO, pressing the AIR FLOW
button will display the current airflow direction, the
comfort setting and the fan speed. Press the AIR
FLOW up or down button again to change the
direction of the airflow.
If the AIR FLOW up button is selected while in the
FRONT defrost mode, the system will direct the air
toward the mid-position. If the AIR FLOW down button
is selected while in the FRONT defrost mode, the
system will direct the air toward the FLOOR, and the
FRONT defrost mode will cancel. Notice the arrows in
the display.
3-5
OFF: If the passenger comfort control is turned on, it
can be turned off by pressing the OFF button once.
Pressing the OFF button a second time will turn off the
main system. Turning off the main system causes the fan
to turn off and the airflow to be directed to the floor. The
system will still try to keep the interior of the vehicle at
the previous chosen comfort setting. The outside
temperature will show on the display when the system
is off.
The ventilation system always allows fresh air to flow
through your vehicle when the vehicle is moving, even
with the system in the OFF mode.
VENT: The VENT button allows outside air to flow
through your vehicle without the air conditioning
compressor working. Selecting the VENT and the
AUTO buttons at the same time allows the system to
control the air flow automatically without the use of the
air conditioning compressor or the use of the RECIRC
mode. To turn off the VENT selection, push the VENT
button again.
RECIRC: When RECIRC is selected, the system will
limit the amount of outside air entering your vehicle.
This is helpful when you are trying to cool the interior
of the vehicle quickly or limit the amount of outside air
entering your vehicle for some other reason. RECIRC
and AUTO may be selected at the same time. The
system will remain in RECIRC until the ignition is
turned off. The system will return back to the previously
selected mode when the car is turned back on. RECIRC
can be selected in all manual airflow modes except
FRONT defrost. RECIRC cannot be selected with the
VENT button.
FRONT: This selection is used to defrost
the windshield by directing the airflow toward
the windshield.
If FRONT is selected while in the AUTO mode, the fan
speed and the air temperature from the front defroster
will vary. If a manual fan speed setting is selected, the
fan speed will remain at that selection until another fan
speed selection is made or the AUTO mode is selected.
To turn off FRONT, press the AUTO or AIR
FLOW button.
FRONT defrost will work better if any ice or snow is
cleared from the hood and the air inlet area between the
base of the windshield and the hood.
3-6
Air Conditioning
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for your
vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed
for the air conditioner to work its best.
On very hot days, the system will automatically enter
the RECIRC mode and the temperature door will be
positioned at the full cold position for maximum
cooling. If the system is not in the AUTO mode,
RECIRC should be selected to provide maximum
cooling. You can choose the extreme comfort setting
of 60 F (15 C), but the system will not cool any faster
by choosing the extreme comfort setting.
Heating
Press AUTO and adjust the temperature by pressing the
TEMP up or down arrow. You may also adjust the
ComforTemp system manually by pressing the AIR
FLOW button until FLOOR appears. Again, adjust the
temperature by pressing the TEMP up or down arrow.
Outside air is sent through the floor outlets. The heater
works best if you keep your windows closed.
Defogging and Defrosting
On cool but humid days, use FRONT to keep the
windshield and side windows clear and to quickly
remove fog, frost or ice from the windshield.
The fan speed will vary while in the AUTO mode. If a
manual fan speed setting is selected, the fan speed will
remain at that selection until the engine is turned off or
another selection has been made. To turn off FRONT,
press AUTO or AIR FLOW.
Rear Window Defogger
The lines you see on the
rear window warm the
glass. Press this button to
start warming your window.
3-7
At speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h), the rear defogger
will stay on until you press the REAR button again.
After 10 minutes of driving below 30 mph (48 km/h),
the defogger will turn off automatically. If you need
additional warming time, push the button again. The
system will then operate for five minutes before going
off by itself.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals
across the defogger grid on the rear window.
NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp
on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid or the
integrated rear window antenna, and the repairs
wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Passenger Climate Control
The front seat passenger can control the air temperature
in their seating area. This can be set up to 5 F (3 C)
cooler or warmer than the primary setting. You can
activate this feature by sliding the lever located on
the right side of the instrument panel toward WARM
or COOL.
If the passenger climate control has been turned on, it
can be turned off by pressing the OFF button once.
Pressing the OFF button a second time will turn off the
main system.
3-8
Ventilation System
For mild outside temperatures when little heating or
cooling is needed, use VENT to direct outside air
through your vehicle. Air will flow through any of the
outlets depending on outside temperatures and comfort
level settings.
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies
outside air into the vehicle when it’s moving. When the
vehicle is not moving, you can get outside air to flow
through by selecting any air choice (except the rear
window defogger) and any fan speed.
Adjust the direction of
airflow by moving the
louvered vents.
You have rear passenger
ComforTemp outlets that
you can use to adjust the
direction of the airflow to
the rear seating area. The
temperature is controlled by
the front passenger setting.
Ventilation Tips
Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction such as leaves. The heater and
defroster will work better, reducing the chance of
fogging your windows.
Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
3-9
Steering Wheel Controls for
Climate Control
You can control the
temperature function by
using the button on your
steering wheel. Press the
TEMP up arrow to increase
the temperature and the
TEMP down arrow to
decrease the temperature.
Audio Systems
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the
most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it
first. Find out what your audio system can do and how
to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the
most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
Setting the Clock
Press and hold HRS until the correct hour appears. Press
and hold MIN until the correct minute appears.
You may set the clock with the ignition off if you
press RECALL first and follow the same procedure
described above.
3-10
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease the volume.
RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall the station
being played or to display the clock. To change what is
normally shown on the display (station or time), press
this button until you see the display you want, then hold
the button until the display flashes. If you press the
button when the ignition is off, the clock will show for a
few seconds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Press the up or down arrow to choose
radio stations.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next
higher or lower station and stay there. The sound will
mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds
and SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to
a station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press one of the SEEK buttons again to stop
scanning. The sound will mute while scanning.
3-11
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press TONE to select the setting you prefer.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons. The
sound will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the tone you selected
will be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of your
preset stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to
the first preset station, stop for a few seconds, then go
on to the next preset station. Press P SCAN again to stop
scanning. If a preset station has weak reception, the
radio will not stop at the preset station.
AUTO SET: Press this button and the system will seek
and set the 12 strongest FM or the 6 strongest AM
stations on your preset buttons (depending on which
band (AM or FM) you are listening to). AUTO SET will
flash while seeking and will remain on until this
function is complete. To return to the stations you
manually set, press AUTO SET again.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increase or decrease bass.
TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increase or decrease treble. If a station is weak
or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset bass
and treble equalization settings designed for classical,
pop, rock, jazz, talk and country/western stations.
CLASS will appear on the display when you first press
TONE. Each time you press it, another setting will
appear on the display. Press it again after C & W
appears and MANUAL will appear. Tone control will
return to the BASS and TREB knobs. Also, if you use
the BASS and TREB knobs, control will return to them
and MANUAL will appear.
3-12
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers.
The middle position balances the sound between
the speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers.
The middle position balances the sound between
the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Cassette Tape
The longer side with the tape visible should face to the
right. If the ignition and the radio are on, the tape can be
inserted and will begin playing. If you hear nothing or
hear a garbled sound, the tape may not be in squarely.
Press EJECT to remove the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOLUME, FADE,
BAL, BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the
radio. Other controls may have different functions when
a tape is inserted. The display will show an arrow to
show which side of the tape is playing.
If you want to insert a tape when the ignition or radio is
off, first press EJECT or RECALL. Cassette tape
adapter kits for portable compact disc players will work
in your cassette tape player.
Your tape bias is set automatically.
If E and a number appear on the radio display, the tape
won’t play because of an error.
E10: The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the
open end down and try to turn the right hub
counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over
and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape
may be damaged and should not be used in the
player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is
working properly.
E11: The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio
displays an error number, write it down and provide it to
your dealer when reporting the problem.
PREV (1): Press this button to search for the previous
selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for PREV to
work. The sound will mute while seeking.
3-13
NEXT (2): Press this button to search for the next
selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for NEXT to
work. The sound will mute while seeking.
The SEEK up and down arrows will also find the
previous and next selections on the tape.
(3): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will
play while the tape reverses.
(4): Press this button to advance quickly to
another part of the tape. Press the button again to
return to playing speed. The radio will play while the
tape advances.
SIDE (5): Press this button to change the side of the
tape that is playing.
(6): Press this button to reduce background noise.
The double-D symbol will appear on the display.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a tape
is in the player.
SOURCE: Press this button to change to the tape
function when the radio is on. TAPE PLAY with an
arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio
will play.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
3-14
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player with Automatic Tone
Control (If Equipped)
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall the station
being played or to display the clock. To change what is
normally shown on the display (station or time), press
the RECALL button until you see the display you want,
then hold the RECALL button until the display flashes.
If you press the button when the ignition is off, the clock
will show for a few seconds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Press the up or down arrow to choose
radio stations.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next
higher or lower station and stay there. The sound will
mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds
and SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to
a station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop
scanning. The sound will mute while scanning.
3-15
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press TONE to select the setting you prefer.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons. The
sound will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the tone you selected
will be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of your
preset stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to
the first preset station, stop for a few seconds, then go
on to the next preset station. Press P SCAN again to stop
scanning. If a preset station has weak reception, the
radio will not stop at the preset station.
AUTO SET: Press this button and the system will seek
and set the 12 strongest FM or the 6 strongest AM
stations on your preset buttons. AUTO SET will flash
while seeking and will remain on until this function is
complete. To return to the stations you manually set,
press AUTO SET again.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends.
Turn the knob to increase or decrease bass.
TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increase or decrease treble. If a station is weak
or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset bass
and treble equalization settings designed for classical,
pop, rock, jazz, talk and country/western stations.
CLASS will appear on the display when you first press
TONE. Each time you press it, another setting will
appear on the display. Press it again after C & W
appears and MANUAL will appear. Tone control will
return to the BASS and TREB knobs. Also, if you use
the BASS and TREB knobs, control will return to them
and MANUAL will appear.
3-16
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers.
The middle position balances the sound between
the speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers.
The middle position balances the sound between
the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Cassette Tape
The longer side with the tape visible should face to the
right. If the ignition and the radio are on, the tape can be
inserted and will begin playing. If you hear nothing or
hear a garbled sound, the tape may not be in squarely.
Press EJECT to remove the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOLUME, FADE,
BAL, BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the
radio. Other controls may have different functions when
a tape is inserted. The display will show an arrow to
show which side of the tape is playing.
If you want to insert a tape when the ignition or radio is
off, first press EJECT or RECALL.
Your tape bias is set automatically.
If E and a number appear on the radio display, the tape
won’t play because of an error.
E10: The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the
open end down and try to turn the right hub
counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over
and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape
may be damaged and should not be used in the
player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is
working properly.
E11: The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio
displays an error number, write it down and provide it to
your dealer when reporting the problem.
PREV (1): Press this button to search for the previous
selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for PREV to
work. The sound will mute while seeking.
3-17
NEXT (2): Press this button to search for the next
selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least
three seconds of silence between each selection for
NEXT to work. The sound will mute while seeking.
The SEEK down and up arrows will also find the
previous and next selections on the tape.
(3): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will
play while the tape reverses.
(4): Press this button to advance quickly to
another part of the tape. Press the button again to
return to playing speed. The radio will play while the
tape advances.
SIDE (5): Press this button to change the side of the
tape that is playing.
RAND (6): Press this button to reduce background
noise. The double-D symbol will appear in the display.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
SOURCE: Press this button to change to the tape or
disc function when the radio is on. If both a tape and a
disc are installed, the system will first go to tape play;
TAPE SIDE and an arrow will appear on the display.
If SOURCE is pressed again, the system will go to
disc play; CD PLAY will appear on the display.
EJECT: The system has two EJECT buttons. Press
the button near the CD slot to remove a disc. Press the
button near the tape slot to remove a tape and the radio
will play.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
Your cassette tape player automatically reduces
background noise from tapes encoded with Dolby NR.
You may turn Dolby NR off by pressing the
number six preset.
3-18
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. The disc should begin playing.
If you want to insert a CD while the ignition or the radio
is off, first press EJECT or RECALL.
If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot,
the disc may not play and an error code may appear on
the display. When the road becomes smooth or the
temperature returns to normal, the disc should play.
If the disc comes out, it could be that:
E20: The disc is upside down.
E20: It is dirty, scratched or wet.
E20: There’s too much moisture in the air.
(Wait about an hour and try again.)
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio
displays an error number, write it down and provide it to
your dealer when reporting the problem.
PREV (1): Press this button to go to the start of the
current track, if more than eight seconds have played.
If you hold the button or press it more than once, the
player will continue moving back through the disc.
The sound will mute while seeking.
NEXT (2): Press this button to go to the next track.
If you hold the button or press it more than once, the
player will continue moving forward through the disc.
The sound will mute while seeking.
The SEEK down and up arrows will also find the
previous and next selections on the disc.
(3): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track. You will hear sound.
(4): Press and hold this button to quickly advance
within a track. You will hear sound.
RAND (6): Press this button to hear the tracks in
random, rather than sequential, order. Press RAND
again to turn off random play.
RECALL: Press this button to see which track is
playing. Press it again within five seconds to see how
long it has been playing. To change what is normally
shown on the display (track or elapsed time), press the
RECALL button until you see the display you want,
then hold the RECALL button until the display flashes.
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a
disc is in the player.
3-19
SOURCE: Press this button to change to the disc
function when the radio is on. When a disc is inserted,
the disc will play until you press AM-FM. Then the disc
will stop playing and the radio will play. Press SOURCE
again to play a disc again. CD PLAY will show on
the display.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the disc.
The radio will play.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a disc in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or system, the disc will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
Also, as a protection feature, if a CD is ejected and left
in the player, it will be pulled back in the player with the
ignition on or off.
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer (Option)
With the optional compact disc changer, you can play up
to 12 discs continuously. Normal size discs may be
played using the trays supplied in the magazine.
The small discs (8 cm) can be played only with specially
designed trays.
You must first load the magazine with discs before you
can play a compact disc. Each of the 12 trays holds one
disc. Press the button on the back of the magazine and
pull gently on one of the trays. Load the trays from
bottom to top, placing a disc on the tray label side down.
If you load a disc with the label side up, the disc will not
play and an error will occur. Gently push the tray back
into the magazine slot. Repeat this procedure for loading
up to 12 discs in the magazine.
3-20
Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine, slide
open the door of the compact disc (CD) changer.
Push the magazine into the changer in the direction of
the arrow marked on top of the magazine.
Close the door by sliding it all the way to the left. If the
door is left partially open, the changer will not operate
and an error will occur. When the door is closed, the
changer will begin checking for discs in the magazine.
This will continue for up to two minutes depending on
the number of discs loaded.
To eject the magazine from the player, slide the CD
changer door all the way open. The magazine will
automatically eject. Remember to keep the door closed
whenever possible to keep dirt and dust from getting
inside the changer.
3-21
All of the CD functions are controlled by the radio
buttons except for ejecting the magazine. Whenever a
CD magazine with discs is loaded in the changer,
CHNGR will appear on the radio display. If the CD
changer is checking the magazine for CDs, CHNGR will
flash on the display until the changer is ready to play.
When a CD begins playing, the disc and track number
will be displayed. The disc numbers are listed on the
front of the magazine.
Compact Disc Changer Errors
If E and a number appear on the display, an error has
occurred and the compact disc temporarily cannot play.
The CD changer will send an error message to the
receiver to indicate:
E30: Disc Loaded Incorrectly (Label Side Up)
E34: CD Changer Door Open
E35: CD Changer Cartridge Empty
If the error occurred while trying to play a CD in the
compact disc player or changer, the following conditions
may have caused the error:
The road is too rough. The disc should play when the
road is smoother.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
The CD changer door is open. Completely close the
door to restore normal operation.
An empty magazine is inserted in the CD changer.
Try the magazine again with a disc loaded on one of
the trays.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio
displays an error number other than the error codes
listed previously, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
Playing a Compact Disc
PREV (1): Press this button to go to the start of the
current track, if more than eight seconds have played.
If you hold the button or press it more than once, the
player will continue moving back through the disc to the
previous track. The sound will mute while seeking.
NEXT (2): Press this button to go to the next track
on the disc. If you hold the button or press it more
than once, the player will continue moving forward
through the disc to the next track. The sound will
mute while seeking.
3-22
(3): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track. You will hear sound.
(4): Press and hold this button to quickly advance
within a track. You will hear sound.
SIDE (5): Press this button to select the next disc in the
magazine. Each time you press SIDE, the disc number on
the radio display will go to that of the next available CD.
If a CD cannot be played, its number will be skipped
when selecting discs while using the SIDE button.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo
with Compact Disc Player and Automatic Tone Control,
pushbutton (5) is not labeled “SIDE,” but still functions
as described.
RAND (6): Press this button to enter the random play
mode. RAND will appear on the display. While in this
mode, tracks and discs will be played in random order.
Press the button again to turn off the random feature and
return to normal operation.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is
currently playing. Press RECALL again within
five seconds to see how long the track has been playing.
EL TM will appear on the display when in elapsed time
mode. When a new track starts to play, the track number
will also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the
time of day will be displayed.
SOURCE: Press this button to play a CD if you have a
magazine loaded in the changer and the radio is playing.
To return to the radio while a CD is playing, press
AM-FM. You can also press this button to switch
between a cassette tape, CD or the CD changer if all
three are loaded.
Personal Choice Radio Controls
(If Equipped)
With this feature, your vehicle will recall the latest radio
settings as adjusted the last time your vehicle was
operated. This feature allows two different drivers to
store and recall their own radio settings for AM and
FM presets, last tuned station, volume, tone and audio
source (radio, cassette or CD). The settings recalled
by the radio are determined by which transmitter
(“1” or “2”) was used to enter the vehicle. The number
on the back of the transmitter corresponds to driver 1 or
to driver 2. After the unlock button is pressed on the
transmitter and the ignition is in RUN, the radio settings
will automatically adjust to where they were last set by
the identified driver. The settings can also be changed by
pressing one of the MEMORY buttons (1 or 2) located
on the driver’s door until you hear two beeps. When
changes are made, the new settings will be saved for
the driver.
3-23
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed.
If THEFTLOCK is active, the THEFTLOCK indicator
will flash when the ignition is off.
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power is removed. If your battery loses power for any
reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret code
before it will operate.
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
The instructions which follow explain how to enter your
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is
recommended that you read through all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between
any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time and
you must start the procedure over at Step 4.
1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from
the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
3. Turn the radio off.
4. Press the “1” and “4” buttons together. Hold
them down until --- shows on the display.
Next you will use the secret code number which
you have written down.
5. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.
6. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press HRS to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show REP to let you know that you
need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code.
9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure.
3-24
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition on. LOC will appear on the display.
2. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.
3. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
4. Press HRS to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is
now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition on before you can try again. When
you try again, you will only have three more chances
(eight tries per chance) to enter the correct code before
INOP appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press the “1” and “4” buttons together. Hold them
down until SEC shows on the display.
4. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
6. Press HRS to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show ---, indicating that the radio
is no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery power is removed and later applied to a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will
appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio see “Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent
Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in this section.
3-25
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
You can control certain radio functions using the buttons
on your steering wheel.
Some steering wheel controls may operate climate
controls. See “Steering Wheel Controls for Climate
Control” earlier in this section.
VOL: Press the up or down arrow to increase or
decrease volume.
SEEK: Press the up arrow to tune to a higher radio
station and the down arrow to tune to a lower radio
station. The sound will mute while seeking. When
playing a cassette tape or a compact disc, press SEEK to
hear the next selection.
AM/FM: Press this button to choose AM, FM1 or FM2.
SCAN: Press this button to scan your radio
preset stations.
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
3-26
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with your
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s
battery or simply having the phone “on.” This
interference is described as an increased level of static
while listening to the radio. If you notice static while
listening to the radio, unplug the cellular phone and
turn it off.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
To help avoid hearing loss or damage:
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio -- be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very
important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, Delphi Delco Electronics
radio or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been
added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
3-27
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on
the display, your cassette tape player needs to be
cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as
soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a
known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape
player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement
in sound quality, clean the tape player.
The recommended cleaning method for your cassette
tape player is the use of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealer (GM Part No. 12344789).
When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because
your unit is equipped with a broken tape detection
feature and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken
tape. If the cleaning cassette ejects, insert the cassette
at least three times to ensure thorough cleaning.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
3-28
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Heated Backlite Antenna
Your AM-FM antenna is integrated with your rear
window defogger, located in the rear window. Be sure
that the inside surface of the rear window is not
scratched and that the lines on the glass are not
damaged. If the inside surface is damaged, it could
interfere with radio reception.
Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting. The metallic film
in some tinting materials will interfere with or distort the
incoming radio reception.
NOTICE:
Do not try to clear frost or other material from
the inside of the rear window with a razor blade
or anything else that is sharp. This may damage
the rear defogger grid and affect your radio’s
ability to pick up stations clearly. The repairs
wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
If, when you turn on your rear window defogger, you
hear static on your radio station, it could mean that a
defogger grid line has been damaged. If this is true, the
grid line must be repaired.
If you choose to add a cellular telephone to your vehicle,
and the antenna needs to be attached to the glass, be sure
that you do not damage the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna. Be sure the antenna does not touch a grid line.
4- 4-1
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2 Defensive Driving
4-3 Drunken Driving
4-6 Control of a Vehicle
4-6 Braking
4-9 Traction Control System (If Equipped)
4-11 Steering
4-13 Off-Road Recovery
4-13 Passing
4-15 Loss of Control
4-16 Driving at Night
4-18 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
4-21 City Driving
4-22 Freeway Driving
4-23 Before Leaving on a Long Trip
4-24 Highway Hypnosis
4-24 Hill and Mountain Roads
4-26 Winter Driving
4-30 Recreational Vehicle Towing
4-30 Loading Your Vehicle
4-32 Towing a Trailer
4-2
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See “Safety Belts” in the Index.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to
brake or turn suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task -- such as concentrating on a cellular telephone
call, reading, or reaching for something on the
floor -- makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull
off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
4-3
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of
victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, about 16,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if
the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
The amount of alcohol consumed
The drinker’s body weight
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a 180-lb.
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce (355 ml) bottles
of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about
0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by
drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or
three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of
a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
4-4
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinking will have a
somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
a lower relative percentage of body water than men.
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
4-5
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or
even fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you’re with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
4-6
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s easy
to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road
can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle.
Also see “Traction Control System” in the Index.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
4-7
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the
traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive
away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that your
brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
If there’s a problem with the
anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stay on.
See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in
the Index.
4-8
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here’s what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
4-9
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel a
slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise, but
this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Traction Control System
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have a traction control system that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system works the front brakes and reduces engine power
to limit wheel spin.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
reengage the cruise control. See “Cruise Control”
in the Index.
4-10
This light should come on
briefly when you start the
engine. If it stays on or
comes on while you are
driving, there’s a problem
with your traction
control system.
See “Traction Control System Warning Light” in the
Index. When this warning light is on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to.
You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets
stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is
required. See “Rocking Your Vehicle” in the Index.
To turn the system off, press the button located at the
end of the shift lever.
The traction control system warning light will come on
and stay on. If the system is limiting wheel spin when
you press the button, the warning light will come
on -- but the system won’t turn off right away.
It will wait until there’s no longer a current need to
limit wheel spin.
You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing
the button again. The traction control system warning
light should go off.
4-11
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Magnetic-Speed Variable Assist Steering
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with this steering system
that continuously adjusts the effort you feel when
steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides ease when
parking yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels.
If there’s no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going
in the same direction. If you’ve ever tried to steer a
vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and
acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet
the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control. Refer to
“Traction Control” in the Index.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it
to go, and slow down.
If you have Stabilitrak , you may see the STABILITY
SYSTEM ACTIVE message on the Driver Information
Center. See “Stability System Active Message” in
the Index.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
4-12
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking -- if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. That’s the time for
evasive action -- steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section. It is better to
remove as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at
all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-13
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so
that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You
can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until the
right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to
crossroads for situations that might affect your passing
patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about
making a successful pass, wait for a better time.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken
center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
4-14
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while
you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, following
too closely reduces your area of vision, especially if
you’re following a larger vehicle. Also, you won’t have
adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or
stops. Keep back a reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t
get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
4-15
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If you have the traction control system, remember:
It helps avoid only the acceleration skid.
If you do not have traction control, or if the system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled by
easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
If you have Stabilitrak , you may see the STABILITY
SYSTEM ACTIVE message on the Driver Information
Center. See “Stability System Active Message” in the Index.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking
(including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear).
Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You may
not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is
skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues -- such as
enough water, ice or packed snow on the road to make a
“mirrored surface” -- and slow down when you
have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-16
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One
reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired -- by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
Drive defensively.
Don’t drink and drive.
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
4-17
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark.
When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and
aren’t even aware of it.
4-18
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
4-19
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
4-20
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or
standing water, water can come in through your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can be
carried away. As little as six inches of flowing
water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants could
drown. Don’t ignore police warning signs, and
otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See “Tires” in the Index.
4-21
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You’ll save time and energy.
See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is
there because the corner is busy enough to need it.
When a light turns green, and just before you start to
move, check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the red light.
4-22
Freeway Driving
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
4-23
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper
lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not,
under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to
the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
Buick dealerships all across North America.
They’ll be ready and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-24
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with the
same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road,
the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against
the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen
to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less
than a second, and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to
the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-25
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels
and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and transaxle.
These parts can work hard on mountain roads.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
CAUTION:
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could
get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down. They could get so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have your engine running
and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highest
gear possible.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be
something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
4-26
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will
be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
4-27
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and the
road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll have a
lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be very careful.
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32 F; 0 C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
If you have traction control, keep the system on. It will
improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a
slippery road. Even though your vehicle has a traction
control system, you’ll want to slow down and adjust
your driving to the road conditions. See “Traction
Control System” in the Index.
If you don’t have the traction control system, accelerate
gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you
accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish
the surface under the tires even more.
4-28
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If
you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious
situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless
you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike
through the snow. Here are some things to do to summon
help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
Turn on your hazard flashers.
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
4-29
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on
with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
4-30
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
NOTICE:
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground will damage drivetrain components.
Loading Your Vehicle
Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it
may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information label
found on the rear edge of the driver’s door tells you the
proper size, speed rating and recommended inflation
pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also gives you
important information about the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and the total weight that you can
carry. This weight is called the Vehicle Capacity Weight
and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all
nonfactory-installed options.
4-31
The other label is the Certification Label, found on the rear
edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed the
GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out. Don’t carry more than 176 lbs. (80 kg) in
your trunk.
CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life
of your vehicle.
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not cover parts or
components that fail because of overloading.
4-32
If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else -- they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and
injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in
a crash.
Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Automatic Level Control
This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level as
the load changes. It’s automatic -- you don’t need to
adjust anything.
Towing a Trailer
CAUTION:
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the
brakes may not work well -- or even at all. You
and your passengers could be seriously injured.
You may also damage your vehicle; the resulting
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the
steps in this section. Ask your dealer for advice
and information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
4-33
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what the
vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer”
that appears later in this section. But trailering is
different than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability and
fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct
equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine is
required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under
greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more, the
trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing
the pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.
Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h), to
save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
4-34
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
the weight of the trailer,
the weight of the trailer tongue
and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. And, it can also depend on any special
equipment that you have on your vehicle.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to
measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your
vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it,
and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if you
tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW
because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See
“Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information
about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
4-35
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). If you have a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label at the rear edge of the
driver’s door, or see “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.
Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your
vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a
few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do,
then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your
vehicle. See “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index.
Dirt and water can, too.
4-36
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly.
Because you have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap into
you vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brake
systems won’t work well, or at all.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
4-37
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
Making Turns
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well
in advance.
4-38
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a different
turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check with your
dealer. The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other
drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you
are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are
still working.
Your vehicle has bulb warning lights. When you plug a
trailer lighting system into your vehicle’s lighting
system, its bulb warning lights may not let you know if
one of your lamps goes out. So, when you have a trailer
lighting system plugged in, be sure to check your
vehicle and trailer lamps from time to time to be sure
they’re all working. Once you disconnect the trailer
lamps, the bulb warning lights again can tell you if
one of your vehicle lamps is out.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down to THIRD (3) and
reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.
4-39
Parking on Hills
CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People can
be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift
into PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking
brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-40
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Start your engine;
Shift into a gear; and
Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake system.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will
help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good
idea to review this information before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See “Engine Overheating”
in the Index.
5- 5-1
Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2 Hazard Warning Flashers
5-2 Other Warning Devices
5-3 Jump Starting
5-7 Towing Your Vehicle
5-8 Engine Overheating
5-10 Cooling System
5-16 If a Tire Goes Flat
5-17 Changing a Flat Tire
5-26 Compact Spare Tire
5-27 If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
5-2
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Press down on the button
located on top of the
steering column to make
your front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on
and off.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
To turn off the flashers, press down on the button again.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
5-3
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. But please follow the steps in this part to
do it safely.
CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
They contain acid that can burn you.
They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all
of these things can hurt you.
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage
to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
The ACDelco battery in your vehicle has a
built-in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or jump
start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear or
light yellow. Replace the battery when there
is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a
cranking complaint.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling
it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
5-4
2. Get the vehicles close enough so that the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t
touching each other. If they are, it could cause a
ground connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be
able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump starting procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) and a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Turn off the
radios and all lamps that aren’t needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. It could
save your radio!
NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
4. Open the hood and locate the batteries.
CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
5. Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on
each battery.
5-5
CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t
need to add water to the ACDelco battery
installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount
of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take
care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could
be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
6. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock
and the vehicles could be damaged.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) and negative (-) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part. Don’t connect positive
(+) to negative (-) or you’ll get a short that would
damage the battery and maybe other parts, too.
CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
7. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-6
8. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
9. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (-) cable doesn’t
go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted
metal part on the engine of the vehicle with the
dead battery.
10. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away
from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that
move. The electrical connection is just as good
there, but the chance of sparks getting back to the
battery is much less.
5-7
11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
12. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
heavy, unpainted metal engine part on the vehicle
that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
negative (-) terminal on the vehicle with the
good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your vehicle towed. See “Roadside
Assistance” and “Recreational Vehicle Towing” in
the Index.
5-8
Engine Overheating
You will find a warning light about a hot engine, as well
as a coolant temperature gage, on your instrument panel.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-9
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE ( )
or THIRD (3).
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while you’re parked. If you still have the
warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of
the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-10
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
A. Radiator Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
C. Coolant Recovery Tank
CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.
See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for
more information on location.
5-11
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
or above the FULL COLD mark. If it isn’t, you may
have a leak in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator,
water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.
CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you
use only DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added
to the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the
use of coolant other than DEX-COOL is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.
5-12
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at or above the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50
mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL
engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index for more information.
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL coolant.
NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-13
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at or
above the FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap -- even a little -- they can come out
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to
turn the pressure cap.
5-14
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap and
upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure
cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops.
(Don’t press down while turning the pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
5-15
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the
FULL COLD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches the
base of the filler neck.
5-16
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the
arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a
skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-17
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move,
you can put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side of the
vehicle, at the opposite end.
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
5-18
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you’ll need is located in the trunk.
Instructions for changing your tires are on the inside of
the tire cover. You can rest the cover near you for easy
reference while you change the tire.
1. Lift the tire cover to gain access to the spare tire and
jacking equipment.
2. Remove the wheel wrench and jack from the
jack container.
3. Remove the spare tire from the trunk. See “Compact
Spare Tire” later in this section for more information
about the compact spare.
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and the
wheel wrench (B).
5-19
Removing Wheel Covers and
Wheel Nut Caps
The following steps are necessary if you have the alloy
(aluminum) wheel with a center cover that conceals
the wheel nuts.
1. Insert the flat end of the wheel wrench in the
notch and pry off the center cover. Do not drop
the cover or lay it face down, as it could be scratched
or damaged.
2. If your vehicle has this
aluminum wheel, it may
have plastic wheel nut
caps. Use the wheel nut
wrench to remove the
wheel nut caps and to
loosen the wheel nuts.
3. When reinstalling the decorative nut caps, tighten the
caps snugly with the wheel wrench, then continue
one-eighth turn for steel caps and one-quarter
turn for plastic caps.
It is not required to remove the center cover on this
wheel; however, if it should be necessary, it should
be removed from the back side by pushing out with a
blunt tool and not pried off from the front.
When reinstalling the cap, there is a plastic
alignment pin which must be aligned with the notch
in the wheel to assure proper installation.
4. After the wheel is put back on the vehicle, reinstall
the cover. Apply pressure around the edge of the
cover to snap it in place. Do not use a hammer or
mallet to install the cover.
5-20
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
1. Use the wheel wrench to loosen the wheel nuts, but
don’t remove them yet.
2. The jack has a bolt at the
end. Attach the wheel
wrench to the bolt to
create a jack handle.
3. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the jack head until it fits under the vehicle.
4. Near each wheel well is a notch in the plastic trim
panel to position the jack head. You’ll find the word
JACK and an arrow stamped into the plastic near
each notch. Position the jack under the vehicle and
raise the jack head until it fits firmly against the
sheet metal next to the word JACK. Do not raise the
vehicle yet. Put the compact spare tire near you.
5-21
CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury
and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise in the jack. Raise the vehicle far enough
off the ground so there is enough room for the spare
tire to fit underneath the wheel well.
6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
5-22
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel
to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or
wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the
rust or dirt off.
CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
8. Install the compact spare tire on the
wheel-mounting surface.
9. Then reinstall the wheel
nuts with the rounded
end of the nuts toward
the wheel. Tighten each
nut by hand until the
wheel is held against
the hub.
5-23
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
11. Using the wheel
wrench, tighten
the wheel nuts
firmly in a
crisscross sequence.
CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, be sure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and
have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench
to 100 lb-ft (140 N·m).
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
5-24
12. Don’t try to put the wheel cover on the compact
spare tire. It won’t fit.
Store the wheel cover in the trunk until you have
the flat tire repaired or replaced.
NOTICE:
Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact spare.
If you try to put a wheel cover on your compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
After you’ve put the compact spare tire on your vehicle,
you’ll need to store the flat tire in your trunk. Use the
following procedure to secure the flat tire in the trunk.
Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as possible.
Store the jack and wheel wrench in their compartment in
the trunk.
5-25
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
Store the compact spare tire and tools as shown in
the diagram. A. Wrench
B. Jack
C. Jack Container
D. Spare Tire Cover
E. Retainer
The compact spare tire is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as you
can. See “Compact Spare Tire” later in this section.
5-26
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should
be 60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare
tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for
distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish
your trip and have your full-size tire repaired or replaced
where you want. You must calibrate the Check Tire
Pressure System after installing or removing the compact
spare. See “Check Tire Pressure System” in the Index.
Of course, it’s best to replace your spare with a full-size tire
as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in
good shape in case you need it again.
NOTICE:
When the compact spare is installed, don’t take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on
the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.
NOTICE:
Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using
them can damage your vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on your
compact spare.
5-27
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your
wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can
help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.
CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle
can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.
NOTICE:
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transaxle back and
forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle
has traction control, you should turn the system off. See
“Traction Control System” in the Index. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear. By
slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse
directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may
free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get you out after a few
tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need to
be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
6- 6-1
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information,
and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2 Service
6-3 Fuel
6-5 Fuels in Foreign Countries
6-5 Filling Your Tank
6-8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container
6-9 Checking Things Under the Hood
6-12 Engine Oil
6-17 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
6-19 Passenger Compartment Air Filter
6-20 Supercharger Oil
6-21 Automatic Transaxle Fluid
6-24 Engine Coolant
6-27 Radiator Pressure Cap
6-27 Power Steering Fluid
6-28 Windshield Washer Fluid
6-30 Brakes
6-33 Battery
6-34 Bulb Replacement
6-45 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
6-46 Tires
6-56 Appearance Care
6-57 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
6-60 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
6-63 Underbody Maintenance
6-63 Chemical Paint Spotting
6-64 GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
6-65 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
6-65 Service Parts Identification Label
6-66 Electrical System
6-72 Removing the Rear Seat Cushion
6-75 Replacement Bulbs
6-76 Capacities and Specifications
6-77 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
6-2
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
6-3
CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside
of your vehicle.
Fuel
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number
(VIN) shows the code letter for your engine. You will
find the VIN at the top left of your instrument panel.
See “Vehicle Identification Number” in the Index.
If you have the 3800 V6 engine (VIN Code K), use
regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher.
If you’re using fuel rated at the recommended octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service. But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging
noise when you’re accelerating or driving up a hill.
That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher
octane fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant
knock that means you have a problem.
If you have the 3800 Supercharged V6 engine
(VIN Code 1), use premium unleaded gasoline rated
at 91 octane or higher. With the 3800 Supercharged
engine, in an emergency, you may be able to use a lower
octane -- as low as 87 -- if heavy knocking does not
occur. If you are using 91 or higher octane unleaded
gasoline and you hear heavy knocking, your engine
needs service.
6-4
It is recommended that the gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association (AAMA) and endorsed by
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers Association
for better vehicle performance and engine protection.
Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could
provide improved driveability and emission control
system performance compared to other gasolines.
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the fuel pump.
Canada Only
Be sure the posted octane for premium is at least
91 (at least 87 for regular). If the octane is less than
87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you
drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emission Standards (indicated on the underhood
emission control label), it is designed to operate on fuels
that meet California specifications. If such fuels are not
available in states adopting California emissions
standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on
fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission
control system performance may be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel
may turn on and/or your vehicle may fail a smog-check
test. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index.
If this occurs, return to your authorized Buick dealer for
diagnosis to determine the cause of failure. In the event
it is determined that the cause of the condition is the
type of fuels used, repairs may not be covered by
your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask your service station operator whether or
not the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not
recommend the use of such gasolines. If fuels containing
MMT are used, spark plug life may be reduced and your
emission control system performance may be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument
panel may turn on. If this occurs, return to your
authorized Buick dealer for service.
6-5
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel
system, allowing your emission control system to
function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add
anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing
oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to
contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that
you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with
the specifications described earlier.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
Filling Your Tank
CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
6-6
The tethered cap is located behind a hinged door on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.
The release button for the
fuel door is located to the
left of the steering column.
There is also a manual fuel
door release. It is located in
the top of the trunk
compartment, on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.
Pull the tab to release the fuel door.
6-7
While refueling, hang the tethered cap from the hook on
the fuel door.
To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the
left (counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in
it; if you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back
to the right.
CAUTION:
If you get gasoline on yourself and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the
fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen
if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure
you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
6-8
NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right
type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light
and your fuel tank and emissions system may be
damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can
be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
Dispense gasoline only into
approved containers.
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
6-9
Checking Things Under the Hood
CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
1. To open the hood, pull
the handle inside the
vehicle. It is located on
the lower left side of the
instrument panel.
6-10
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate the
secondary hood release. It is under the front edge of
the grille.
3. Lift up on this lever as you lift up the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on
properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
6-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 3800 (L36) engine (3800 Supercharged (L67) engine similar), here’s what you will see:
A. Battery
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Oil Dipstick
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap
E. Automatic Transaxle
Fluid Dipstick
F. Brake Master Cylinder
G. Windshield Washer
Fluid Reservoir
H. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank
I. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
6-12
Engine Oil
If the ENGINE OIL LOW - CHECK LEVEL DIC
message appears on the instrument panel, it means you
need to check your engine oil level right away. For more
information, see “DIC Warnings and Messages” in
the Index.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
Checking Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick is
located behind the engine
cooling fans and in front of
the engine oil fill cap.
The top of the dipstick is a
round, yellow loop.
See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for
more information on location.
6-13
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so
much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper
operating range, your engine could be damaged.
Add engine oil at the engine oil fill cap next to the oil
dipstick. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the
Index for more information on location.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
6-14
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the starburst symbol.
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any
oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.
If you change your own oil,
be sure you use oil that has
the starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container. If
you have your oil changed
for you, be sure the oil put
into your engine is
American Petroleum
Institute certified for
gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
SAE 10W-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can
use SAE 5W-30 if it’s going to be colder than 60 F
(16 C) before your next oil change. When it’s very cold,
you should use SAE 5W-30. These numbers on an oil
container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.
6-15
NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage not
covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls below
-20 F (-29 C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good
performance and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil (Vehicles
Without the GM Oil Life System )
If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city
maintenance schedule:
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
Most trips are through dusty areas.
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever
occurs first.
If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed
engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to
break down slower.
6-16
When to Change Engine Oil (Vehicles With
the GM Oil Life System Option)
If so equipped, your vehicle has a computer that lets you
know when to change your engine oil. This is not based
on mileage, but on engine revolutions and engine
operating temperature. When the computer has
calculated that the oil needs changing, the GM Oil Life
System will indicate that a change is necessary.
The mileage between oil and filter changes will vary
depending on how you drive your vehicle -- usually
between 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and 10,000 miles
(16 000 km) since your last oil and filter change. Under
severe conditions, the system may come on before
3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle more
than 10,000 miles (16 000 km) or 12 months
(whichever occurs first) without an oil change.
The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So, if you drive
in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner. Remember to
reset the Oil Life System whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Oil Life System (If Equipped)
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil
change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Oil Life
System, press and hold the DIC RESET button for more
than five seconds while the OIL LIFE INDEX is being
displayed on the DIC. The oil life will change to 100%.
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw
away clothing or rags containing used engine oil.
See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and
disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil
from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil
by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil.
If you have a problem properly disposing of your used
oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
6-17
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment. See “Engine Compartment
Overview” in the Index for more information on location.
To check or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do
the following:
1. Remove the wing nuts on the air cleaner
housing cover.
6-18
2. Remove the air intake hose that snaps over the
throttle body by pulling the hose upward and away
from the throttle body. As you are detaching the
hose, remove the air cleaner housing cover by
pulling upward and rearward.
3. Check or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Reattach the air intake hose.
5. Reinstall the air cleaner housing cover.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
replace the air filter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
6-19
CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the
engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
NOTICE:
If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can cause
a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily
get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place
when you’re driving.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Passenger compartment air, both outside air and
recirculated air, is routed through a passenger
compartment filter, which is part of a three piece filter
system. The filter removes certain particles from the air,
including pollen and dust particles. Reductions in
airflow, which may occur more quickly in dusty areas,
indicate that the filter needs to be replaced early.
The particle filter is located inside the air control
module. The air control module is located behind an
access panel near the accelerator pedal.
6-20
The filter should be replaced as part of routine
scheduled maintenance. See “Maintenance Schedule” in
the Index for replacement intervals. See your dealer for
details on changing the filter.
Once you remove your filter, if you choose not to
replace it, it will not damage your vehicle.
However, the air will no longer be filtered.
Supercharger Oil
Unless you are
technically qualified
and have the proper
tools, you should let
your dealer or a
qualified service
center perform
this maintenance.
When to Check
Check oil level every 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or every
36 months, whichever occurs first.
What Kind of Oil to Use
Use only the recommended supercharger oil. See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
How to Check and Add Oil
Check oil only when the engine is cold. Allow the
engine to cool two to three hours after running.
CAUTION:
If you remove the supercharger oil fill plug while
the engine is hot, pressure may cause hot oil to
blow out of the oil fill hole. You may be burned.
Do not remove the plug until the engine cools.
1. Clean the area around the oil fill plug before removing it.
2. Remove the oil fill plug using a 3/16 inch Allen wrench.
3. The oil level is correct when it just reaches the
bottom of the threads of the inspection hole.
4. Replace the oil plug with the O-ring in place.
Tighten to 88 lb-in (10 N·m).
6-21
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90 F (32 C) or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of
these conditions, change the fluid and filter
at 100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading
on the dipstick.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts
or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to
get an accurate reading if you check your
transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
When outside temperatures are above 90 F (32 C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be
at normal operating temperature, which is 180 F to
200 F (82 C to 93 C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50 F
(10 C). If it’s colder than 50 F (10 C), you may
have to drive longer.
6-22
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
Park your vehicle on a level place.
Keep the engine running.
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The transaxle fluid
dipstick top is a round,
red loop and is located
next to the brake
master cylinder behind
the engine block. See
“Engine Compartment
Overview” in
the Index for
more information
on location.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
6-23
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the
cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transaxle fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to
bring the level into the cross-hatched area on the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON -III, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transaxle.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON -III
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
6-24
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL coolant will:
Give freezing protection down to -34 F (-37 C).
Give boiling protection up to 265 F (129 C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you
use only DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added
to the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the
use of coolant other than DEX-COOL is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
6-25
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you
don’t need to add anything else.
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL coolant.
NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core
and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.
6-26
Checking Coolant
The coolant recovery tank is located on the driver’s side of
the engine compartment. See “Engine Compartment
Overview” in the Index for more information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at FULL
COLD or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the
level should be up to FULL HOT or a little higher.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be
careful not to spill it.
CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost
never have to add coolant at the radiator.
Never turn the radiator pressure cap -- even a
little -- when the engine and radiator are hot.
6-27
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For
information on how to add coolant to the radiator, see
“Cooling System” in the Index.
Radiator Pressure Cap
NOTICE:
Your radiator pressure cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap
line up with the overflow tube on the radiator
filler neck.
Power Steering Fluid
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear
an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate
a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.
The power steering fluid reservoir on the L36 and
L67 engine is located below the generator and behind
the accessory drive belt on the passenger’s side toward
the rear of the engine.
6-28
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove
the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up
to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
When the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low,
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID LOW will be
displayed on the DIC (if equipped).
6-29
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located by the
coolant recovery tank on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in
the Index for more information on location.
Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY.
Add washer fluid until the tank is full.
NOTICE:
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other parts of the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank if it is
completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
6-30
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is on the driver’s
side of the engine compartment. See “Engine
Compartment Overview” in the Index. It is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the
reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid
goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake
lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level
goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out
of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your
brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the
engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot
enough. You or others could be burned, and your
vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
6-31
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. A chime will sound if you
try to drive with this warning light on. See “Brake
System Warning Light” in the Index.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.
Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the
Maintenance Schedule.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
NOTICE:
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.
6-32
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn
and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or
be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when
you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this manual
under Part C “Periodic Maintenance Inspections.”
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
6-33
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts.
When you replace parts of your braking system -- for
example, when your brake linings wear down and you
have to have new ones put in -- be sure you get new
approved GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes
may no longer work properly. For example, if someone
puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the
balance between your front and rear brakes can
change -- for the worse. The braking performance you’ve
come to expect can change in many other ways if someone
puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelco battery. When it’s time for a new battery, get
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco
battery. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the
Index for battery location.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more,
remove the black, negative (-) cable from the battery.
This will help keep your battery from running down.
CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
6-34
Bulb Replacement
The following procedure tells you how to replace the
bulbs for some of the exterior lamps. For the type of
bulb to use, see “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index. For
any bulbs not listed in this section, contact your dealer’s
service department.
Halogen Bulbs
CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
Headlamps
Each headlamp is attached by thumb screws.
6-35
1. Remove the thumb screws by turning
them counterclockwise. 2. Pull the headlamp away from the vehicle.
6-36
3. Remove the bulb socket
by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise,
while pressing it firmly.
Then pull it out. You can
use pliers to remove the
bulb socket if you are
unable to do it by hand.
4. Remove the wire connector from the bulb by
lifting the lock tab and pulling it away from the
plastic base.
5. Replace the old bulb with a new bulb.
6. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reassemble the
lamp assembly.
When reassembling the lamp, make sure to align the
pin at the outboard edge of the headlamp assembly to
the plastic retainer at the outboard edge of the vehicle.
6-37
Headlamp Aiming
The headlamp aiming device is under the hood, directly
behind the headlamps.
Your vehicle has a headlamp system equipped with
horizontal and vertical aim indicators. The aim has been
pre-set at the factory and should need no further
adjustment. This is true even though your vertical and
horizontal aim indicators may not fall exactly on
the “0” (zero) marks on their scales.
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp
aim may be affected. Aim adjustment may be necessary
if it is difficult to see lane markers (for horizontal aim),
or if oncoming drivers flash their high beams at you (for
vertical aim). If you believe your headlamps need to be
re-aimed, we recommend that you take it to your dealer
for service; however, it is possible for you to re-aim
your headlamps as described in the following procedure.
NOTICE:
To make sure your headlamps are aimed
properly, read all the instructions before
beginning. Failure to follow these instructions
could cause damage to headlamp parts.
6-38
To check the aim, the vehicle should be properly
prepared as follows:
The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly
level surface.
If necessary, pads may be used on an uneven surface.
The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or mud
attached to it.
The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other
work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.
There should not be any cargo or loading of the
vehicle, except it should have a full tank of fuel and
one person or 160 lbs. (75 kg) on the driver’s seat.
Close all doors.
Tires should be properly inflated.
Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspension.
Start with the horizontal aim. The adjustment screws can be
turned with an E8 Torx socket or T15 Torx screwdriver.
Once the horizontal aim is adjusted, then adjust the
vertical aim.
1. Turn the horizontal
aiming screw (A)
until the
indicator (B) is
lined up with zero.
6-39
2. Turn the vertical aiming screw (C) until the level
bubble (D) is lined up with zero. Front Turn Signal
1. Remove the headlamp assembly as described in the
headlamp removal procedure previously in this section.
2. Once the headlamp
assembly has been
removed, reach down
from the top of the
vehicle and, while
pressing the lock tab on
the socket, turn the
socket one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and
pull it out.
3. Remove the old bulb by pulling it straight out
of the socket.
4. Replace the bulb and turn the bulb assembly back
into place.
6-40
Rear Quarterpanel Turn Signal Lamps
and Stoplamps
There are turn lamps and stoplamps that are part of the
taillamp assembly located at the rear of the vehicle on
each rear quarterpanel. The following instructions
explain how to access these bulbs. (To access the lamps
located on the trunk lid see the information following.)
1. Open the trunk. On either side of the rear of the
trunk is a plastic retainer that holds the cargo net and
taillamp assembly in place.
2. Unhook the cargo net
from the cargo net
retainer and remove the
retainer by turning
it counterclockwise.
3. Remove the plastic retaining screws on the
trunk’s interior.
4. Pull back the trunk trim panel.
5. Beneath the trim panel are three nuts that secure
the taillamp assembly. Remove these nuts with a
10 mm wrench. Remove the nuts only from the side
you want to access. The turn signal and a stoplamp
can now be accessed.
6-41
6. Pull the taillamp assembly away from the vehicle.
7. Remove the bulb socket
assembly by turning the
socket one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and
pulling it out.
8. Once the socket has
been removed, pull the
bulb straight out to
remove it from
the socket.
9. Replace it with a new bulb.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 8 to reinstall the
taillamp assembly.
6-42
Trunk-Mounted Rear Turn Signals,
Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps
There are turn lamps, stoplamps and back-up bulbs
located behind the taillamp assembly along the trunk lid.
The following instructions explain how to access
these bulbs.
1. There are four studs
located at the edge of the
trunk lid. Remove the
protective vinyl caps
from the studs.
2. Use a 10 mm wrench to remove the nuts from
the studs.
6-43
3. Next, remove the six fasteners along the top of the
trunk lid (three on each side), holding the trunk trim
in place.
4. Pull the trunk trim back to expose the three remaining
nuts holding the taillamp assembly in place. Remove
the protective vinyl caps from the studs.
6-44
5. From inside the trunk compartment, use a 10 mm
wrench to remove the nuts from the studs. 6. Pull the taillamp assembly away from the trunk lid.
The bulbs are located on the back side of the assembly.
6-45
7. Turn the bulb socket
one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and
pull it out. You can use
pliers to remove the bulb
socket if you are unable
to do it by hand.
8. Once the socket has
been removed, pull the
bulb straight out to
remove it from
the socket.
9. Replace it with a new bulb.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 8 to reinstall the
taillamp assembly.
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” in the Index for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways.
To replace the wiper blade assembly, do the following:
1. Position the wipers on the windshield in the
“mid” wipe position.
2. Lift the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield. The windshield wiper does not have a
locking upright position feature.
6-46
3. Push the tab on the wiper blade assembly and pull
the assembly down enough to release it from the
“U” hooked end of the wiper arm. Slide the
assembly away from the arm.
4. Replace the blade.
5. To reinstall the wiper blade assembly, slide it over
the wiper arm to engage the “U” hooked end on the
wiper blade assembly. Pull up on the assembly to
lock it into place.
For the correct windshield wiper blade replacement
length and type, see “Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts” in the Index.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see
your Buick Warranty booklet for details.
CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
CAUTION: (Continued)
6-47
CAUTION: (Continued)
Overinflated tires are more likely to
be cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact -- such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Tire-Loading Information label, which is located on
the rear edge of the driver’s door, shows the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can
get the following:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy.
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
Unusual wear
Bad handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards.
6-48
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
Check Tire Pressure System (If Equipped)
The check tire pressure system can alert you to a large
change in the pressure of one tire. The system won’t alert
you before you drive that a tire is low or flat. You must
begin driving before the system will work properly.
The TIRE PRESSURE LOW message will appear on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) if pressure
difference (low pressure) is detected in one tire. The
check tire pressure system may not alert you if:
more than one tire is low,
the vehicle is moving faster than 65 mph (105 km/h),
the system is not yet calibrated,
the tire treadwear is uneven,
the compact spare tire is installed,
tire chains are being used, or
the vehicle is being driven on a rough or frozen road.
If the anti-lock brake system warning light comes on,
the check tire pressure system may not be working
properly. See your dealer for service. Also, see
“Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light” in the Index.
The check tire pressure system detects differences in tire
rotation speeds that are caused by changes in tire pressure.
The system can alert you about a low tire -- but it doesn’t
replace normal tire maintenance. See “Tires” in the Index.
6-49
When the TIRE PRESSURE LOW message appears on
the Driver Information Center, you should stop as soon
as you can and check all your tires for damage. If a tire
is flat, see “If a Tire Goes Flat” in the Index. Also check
the tire pressure in all four tires as soon as you can.
See “Inflation-Tire Pressure” in the Index.
Any time you adjust a tire’s pressure or have one or
more tires repaired or replaced, you’ll need to reset
(calibrate) the check tire pressure system. You’ll also
need to reset the system whenever you rotate the tires,
buy new tires, install or remove the compact spare, and
whenever the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected.
Don’t reset the check tire pressure system without first
correcting the cause of the problem and checking and
adjusting the pressure in all four tires. If you reset the
system when the tire pressures are incorrect, the check
tire pressure system will not work properly and may not
alert you when a tire is low or high.
To reset (calibrate) the system:
1. Turn the ignition switch to RUN.
2. Press the GAGE INFO button on the DIC until
TIRE PRESSURE appears on the display.
3. Press and hold the DIC RESET button for about
five seconds. After five seconds, the display will
show TIRE PRESSURE RESET. If TIRE
PRESSURE RESET does not appear on the display
after about five seconds, see your dealer for service.
After you release the DIC RESET button, TIRE
PRESSURE NORMAL will appear on the display.
The system completes the calibration process during
driving. Calibration time can take 45 to 90 minutes,
depending on your driving habits. After the system has
been calibrated, the system will alert the driver that a tire
is low, up to a maximum speed of 65 mph (105 km/h).
6-50
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual wear,
rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and “Wheel
Replacement” later in this section for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled
rotation intervals.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your
tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire-Loading
Information label. Reset the Check Tire Pressure
System. See “Check Tire Pressure System” in the Index.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When you change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if
you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.
6-51
When It’s Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.
6-52
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Tire-Loading Information label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by
an “MS” (for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type
(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same
size and type tires on all wheels.
It’s all right to drive with your compact spare,
though. It was developed for use on your vehicle.
CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could
fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
6-53
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction -- AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
6-54
Temperature -- A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required
by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not
needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
6-55
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for replacement.
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for
more information.
Used Replacement Wheels
CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or
how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause an accident. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
6-56
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
Use tire chains only where legal and only when
you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install
them on the front tires and tighten them as
tightly as possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels
with chains on will damage your vehicle.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
6-57
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and Soil
Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will clean
normal spots and stains very well. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.
Here are some cleaning tips:
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains
are stubborn.
If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the
entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner
on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section.
Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on
the container label to form thick suds.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge.
Don’t saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove the suds.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
6-58
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and
blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner instructions described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to
dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for
Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner.
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
You may have to do it more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you
don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth and a
vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the
leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
See your dealer for this product.
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.
6-59
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a
soft cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect
the surface finish.
Cleaning Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker won’t be damaged. Clean spots with just water
and mild soap.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass.
See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may have to be scraped off later.
If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.
6-60
Cleaning the Outside of the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax,
sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield
Cleaner, Bon Ami Powder (non-scratching glass
cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The windshield
is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone
grease with a clean cloth at least every six months. During
very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in
the Index.
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or
chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. See
“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index. Don’t
use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that
contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be
flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface,
or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
6-61
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on
a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Cleaning Aluminum or
Chrome-Plated Wheels (If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners
with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because
you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish
on aluminum wheels.
6-62
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care to
wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted
surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum-based products may damage the paint
finish and tires.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
6-63
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control
can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed,
accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody
parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system even though they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do
this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots
etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Buick
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
6-64
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
PART NUMBER SIZE DESCRIPTION USAGE
994954 23 in. x 25 in. Polishing Cloth – Wax Treated Exterior polishing cloth
1050172 16 oz. (0.473 L) Tar and Road Oil Remover Removes tar, road oil and asphalt
1050173 16 oz. (0.473 L) Chrome Cleaner and Polish Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass
1050174 16 oz. (0.473 L) White Sidewall Tire Cleaner Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls
1050214 32 oz. (0.946 L) Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops
1050427 23 oz. (0.680 L) Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
1052918** 8 oz. (0.237 L) Armor All Protectant Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas , plastic,
rubber and vinyl
1052925 16 oz. (0.473 L) Multi-Purpose
Interior Cleaner Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels
and floor mats
1052929 16 oz. (0.473 L) Wheel Cleaner Spray on and rinse with water
1052930 8 oz. (0.237 L) Capture Dry Spot Remover Attracts, absorbs and removes soils on fabric
12345721 2.5 sq. ft. Synthetic Chamois Shines vehicle without scratching
12345725 12 oz. (0.354 L) Silicone Tire Shine Spray on tire shine
12377964* 16 oz. (0.473 L) Finish Enhancer Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants
12377966* 16 oz. (0.473 L) Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish
12377984* 16 oz. (0.473 L) Surface Cleaner Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products. * For exterior use only.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. **Not recommended for use on instrument panels.
6-65
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the spare tire cover. It’s very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and
special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
6-66
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as
they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of damage
caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle: the
instrument panel fuse block located under the instrument
panel, the underhood fuse block located on the
passenger’s side engine compartment and the rear fuse
block, located under the rear seat.
6-67
Instrument Panel Fuse Block and Bussed Electrical
Center (BEC)
The instrument panel fuse block and BEC are located
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle, under the
instrument panel.
Remove the hush panel on the passenger’s side to reveal
the fuses. To remove the panel, do the following:
1. Remove the two 7 mm screws located along the front
edge of the panel.
2. Lower the hush panel.
3. Remove the cover. Now you can see the fuses and
replace them.
4. Place the wide end of the fuse puller over the plastic
end of the fuse.
5. Squeeze the ends over the fuse and pull it out.
When finished, reinstall the hush panel. Reinstall lamps,
connectors, and HVAC duct temperature sensors if they
were removed.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Fuse Usage
SBM Interior Lamps
PDM PDM Module
A/C HVAC Motor, HVAC Mix Motors
6-68
Fuse Usage
IGN SEN EC Mirror, Driver HTS Seat,
Rear Defog Relay, MEM Module,
Cool LVL Sensor,
Pass Heated Seat
ELC HVAC Flat Pk Mtrs, ELC Sensor,
ELC Sensor (R Bec)
ABS Anti-Lock Brake System Module
HVAC HVAC Main Con Head,
HVAC Programmer, IPC
CR CONT Stepper Motor CR, Cruise Switch
HUD HUD Switch, HUD Display
CSTR/SBM HVAC Programmer,
IPC (Cluster),
SBM (275 to LCM)
(1135 to BTSI SL)
Fuse Usage
LP PK L Underhood Lamp, L PK/
Sidemarker, L Park/Turn Lamp,
SBM, L Tail Signal Lamp,
L Tail/Stoplamp,
L Rear Sidemarker
LP PK R Rt Pk/Sidemarker Lamp,
Rt PK/Turn Lamp, Rt Tail/Sign
Lamp, Rt Tail/Stoplamp, Rt Rear
Sidemarker, Stop/Taillamp,
Tail/Signal Lamp,
License Lamp, RFA
RUN Run/Accessory
WSW Wiper Motor
Blank Not Used
WSW/RFA Wiper Switch, RFA, Rain Sense
B/U LP EC Mirror, Back-Up Lamps
6-69
Instrument Panel Bussed Electrical Center (BEC)
Fuse Usage
PERIM LP Perimeter Lamps
ACCY Accessory
IGN 3 Ignition 3
Underhood Fuse Block
There are additional fuses located on the passenger’s
side of the engine compartment.
To check the fuses in this underhood fuse center, turn
the knob counterclockwise and remove the cover. There
is a chart inside the cover that explains the features and
controls governed by each fuse and relay.
6-70
Minifuses Usage
1 Air Sol
2 SBM, LCM
3 Turn Signal
4Pre-Oxygen Sensor,
Post-Oxygen Sensor
5 Air Bag (SIR)
6 PCM
Minifuses Usage
7 AC Clutch
8 Ignition Feed
9 Horn Relay
10 Spare
11 Spare
12 Injectors #1-6
13 C-31
14 Right High Beam
15 Spare
16 Left High Beam
17 Spare
18 Right Low Beam
19 Left Low Beam
20 Stop
21 Fuel Pump Relay (Wire in BEC)
22 Run/CRK
23 PCM
6-71
Minifuses Usage
24 Parking Lamp
25 Hazard Flashers
26 Spare
27 Spare
28 ABS #2
Mini Relays Usage
29 Ignition
30 Horn
31 Cool Fan #2
32 Starter
33 Air Pump
34 Cool Fan SP
35 Cool Fan 1
Micro Relays Usage
36 A/C CLU
37 Fuel Pump
Maxifuses Usage
38 Bat #1
39 Blower Motor
40 Cool Fan 2
41 Headlamp
42 BAT #2
43 Ignition
44 Starter
45 ABS
46 Fuse Puller
6-72
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion
NOTICE:
A fuse center is located under the rear seat
cushion. To help avoid damage to the fuse center,
be careful when removing or reinstalling the
seat cushion.
To Remove the Rear Seat Cushion
1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release the
front hooks.
2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front
of the vehicle.
To Reinstall the Rear Seat Cushion
6-73
CAUTION:
A safety belt that isn’t properly routed through
the seat cushion or is twisted won’t provide the
protection needed in a crash. If the safety belt
hasn’t been routed through the seat cushion at
all, it won’t be there to work for the next
passenger. The person sitting in that position
could be badly injured. After reinstalling the seat
cushion, always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and are not twisted.
1. Buckle the center passenger position safety belt, then
route the safety belts through the proper slots in the
seat cushion. Don’t let the safety belts get twisted.
2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the
seatback so the rear locating guides hook into the
wire loops on the back frame.
3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward and
then press down on the seat cushion until the spring
locks on both ends engage.
4. Check to make sure the safety belts are properly
routed and that no portion of any safety belt is
trapped under the seat. Also make sure the seat
cushion is secured.
6-74
Rear Compartment Fuse Block
Additional fuses are located in the fuse center under
the rear seat.
Mini Relay Usage
1 Heated Backlite
Micro Relays Usage
2 RAP
3 Trunk Release
4 ELC
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
5 Power Seat
6 ELC Sensor,
ELC Compressor Solenoid
Minifuses Usage
7 Crank
8 Auxiliary Outlet
9 PCM/CRU
10 SBM Module
11 Radio/Phone
12 Sunroof
13 Spare
14 CD Changer, Phone
6-75
Minifuses Usage
15 Driver Door Module
16 Spare
17 Radio
18 Driver Heated Seat Module
19 Rear Door Module
20 Trunk Release
21 Spare
22 IP Ashtray Cigarette Lighter
23 Spare
24 Spare
25 Passenger Heated Seat Module
26 Right Rear Cig Lighter
27 Left Rear Cig Lighter
28 RFA, Memory Seat Module,
Driver Seat Switch
Replacement Bulbs
Lamp Bulb Number
Headlamp
High-Beam 9005. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low-Beam 9006. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking/Turn, Front 3057. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back-Up 3057. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tail/Turn 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tail/Stop 3057. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For service information on other bulbs, contact your
dealer’s service department.
6-76
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English
and metric conversions. Please refer to “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for more information.
Capacities
Automatic Transaxle
Pan Removal and Replacement 7.4 quarts (7.0 L). . .
After Complete Overhaul 10.0 quarts (9.5 L). . . . .
Cooling System 13.0 quarts (12.3 L). . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Crankcase
Oil change with filter change 4.5 quarts (4.3 L). . .
Fuel Tank 18.5 U.S. gallons (70.0 L). . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering
Pump Only 1.0 pint (0.5 L). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Complete System 1.5 pints (0.7 L). . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure See Tire-Loading Information label. . .
on the rear edge of the driver’s door.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant See refrigerant. . . . . .
charge label under the hood.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill
to the appropriate level as recommended in this manual.
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb-ft (140 N·m)
Engine Specifications
VIN Engine Code
3800 V6 Engine (L36) K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3800 V6 Supercharged Engine (L67) 1. . . . . . . . . .
Type V6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displacement 3.8L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compression Ratio
3800 V6 Engine (L36) 9:4:1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3800 V6 Supercharged Engine (L67) 8:5:1. . . . . . .
Horsepower
3800 V6 Engine (L36) 205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3800 V6 Supercharged Engine (L67) 240. . . . . . . .
Firing Order 1-6-5-4-3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermostat Temperature 195 F (91 C). . . . . . . . .
6-77
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter GM Part No. 25096932. . . .
Engine Oil Filter GM Part No. 25010792. . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Filter GM Part No. 25121942. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spark Plugs GM Part No. 25161444*. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gap 0.060 inch (.152 cm)
Windshield Wiper Blades
Type Hook Style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Length 22.0 inches (56.0 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter GM Part No. 52472175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*On 3800 Supercharged Engine (Code 1) only, this
replaces original spark plug NGK Type PTR4B-15.
Vehicle Dimensions
Length 206.8 inches (525.3 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Width 74.7 inches (189.7 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Height 57.4 inches (145.8 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheelbase 113.8 inches (289.1 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread
Front Tire 62.7 inches (159.3 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Tire 62.3 inches (158.2 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7- 7-1
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2 Introduction
7-4 Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
7-8 Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
7-21 Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
7-29 Part B: Owner Checks and Services
7-33 Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
7-35 Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
7-37 Part E: Maintenance Record
7-2
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure to
follow recommended maintenance may not be
covered by warranty.
7-3
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.
CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can
be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work.
If you want to get the service information, see
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service department
or another qualified service center should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help keep
your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or
their equivalents, should be used whether you do the
work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you
to record and keep track of the maintenance performed
on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts.
They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
7-4
Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle
in good working condition. But we don’t know exactly
how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short distances
only a few times a week. Or you may drive long
distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may
use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive
it to work, to do errands or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them. If you
go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part D.
Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these. All
parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done
before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Tire-Loading Information label. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is
right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which
schedule to follow:
Scheduled Maintenance
7-5
Short Trip/City Definition
Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if
any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
Most trips are through dusty areas.
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule
if you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oil to break
down sooner.
Short Trip/City Intervals
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 12,000 Miles (20 000 km): Passenger
Compartment Air Filter Replacement.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air
Cleaner Filter Replacement. Supercharger Oil Check
(or every 36 months, whichever occurs first)
(3800 Code 1 V6 engine only).
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
(Continued)
Scheduled Maintenance
7-6
Short Trip/City Intervals
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Automatic
Transaxle Service (normal conditions).
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
Long Trip/Highway Definition
Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none
of the conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance are true. Do not use this schedule if the
vehicle is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area
or used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City
schedule for these conditions.
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under
highway conditions causes engine oil to break
down slower.
Scheduled Maintenance
7-7
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Passenger
Compartment Air Filter Replacement.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Supercharger Oil
Check (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first)
(3800 Code 1 V6 engine only). Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Automatic
Transaxle Service (normal conditions).
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
7-8
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
* If your vehicle has a GM Oil Life System , the system
will show you when to change the oil -- usually between
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and 10,000 miles (16 000 km)
since your last oil change. Under severe conditions, the
indicator may come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km).
Never drive your vehicle more than 10,000 miles
(16 000 km) or 12 months, (whichever occurs first),
without an oil and filter change.
The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So if you drive in
a dusty area be sure to change your oil every 3,000
miles (5 000 km) or sooner if the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message appears. Remember to reset the
Oil Life System whenever the oil is changed. For more
information, see “Oil Life System” in the Index.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under
“Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of
this schedule.
@ Whenever the tires are rotated, the Check Tire Pressure
System (if your vehicle is so equipped) must be reset.
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
7-9
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Replace passenger compartment air filter.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
7-10
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.
Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
7-11
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Replace passenger compartment air filter.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
For supercharged engines only: Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as
needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first). See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
7-12
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Replace passenger compartment air filter.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
7-13
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.
Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Replace passenger compartment air filter.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90 F (32 C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km).
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
7-14
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
7-15
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Replace passenger compartment air filter.
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
For supercharged engines only: Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as
needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first). See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
7-16
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Replace passenger compartment air filter.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
7-17
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.
Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Replace passenger compartment air filter.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
7-18
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
For supercharged engines only: Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as
needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first). See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
7-19
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Replace passenger compartment air filter.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
7-20
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly
reaches 90 F (32 C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transaxle fluid,
change both the fluid and filter.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
7-21
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
* If your vehicle has the GM Oil Life System , the
system will show you when to change the engine oil and
filter -- usually between 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and
10,000 miles (16 000 km) since your last oil change.
Under severe conditions, the indicator may come on
before 3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle
more than 10,000 miles (16 000 km) or 12 months
without an oil and filter change.
The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So if you drive in
a dusty area, be sure to change your oil and filter every
3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message appears. Remember to
reset the Oil Life System whenever the oil is changed.
For more information, see “Oil Life System” in
the Index.
@ Whenever the tires are rotated, the Check Tire Pressure
System (if your vehicle is so equipped) must be reset.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under
“Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of
this schedule.
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
7-22
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Replace passenger compartment air filter.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
7-23
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Replace passenger compartment air filter.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
For supercharged engines only: Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as
needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first). See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
7-24
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Replace passenger compartment air filter.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90 F (32 C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km).
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
7-25
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Replace passenger compartment air filter.
For supercharged engines only: Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as
needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first). See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
7-26
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Replace passenger compartment air filter.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
7-27
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Replace passenger compartment air filter.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
For supercharged engines only: Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as
needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first). See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
7-28
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90 F (32 C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transaxle fluid,
change both the fluid and filter.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
7-29
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Listed in this part are owner checks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL
coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index
for further details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.
Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See “Tires” in the
Index for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the
Index for further details.
7-30
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or
miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone
grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, damp weather
more frequent application may be required. See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Automatic Transaxle Check
Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed.
See “Automatic Transaxle Fluid” in the Index. A fluid
loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and
repair if needed.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all body door hinges. Also lubricate all hinges
and latches, including those for the hood, glove box
door and console door. Part D tells you what to use.
More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment.
7-31
Starter Switch Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary.
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary.
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
7-32
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
The key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle PARK (P)
Mechanism Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
7-33
Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center do
these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals if necessary.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which could
cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust”
in the Index.
7-34
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the
cooling system and pressure cap is recommended at
least once a year.
Throttle System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any components that have high effort
or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and
cruise control cables.
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking
brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes
inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions
result in frequent braking.
7-35
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT
Engine Oil Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol
of the proper viscosity. To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and use only
GM Goodwrench DEX-COOL
or Havoline DEX-COOL
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index.
USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT
Hydraulic
Brake System Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).
Windshield
Washer Solvent GM Optikleen Washer Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515)
or equivalent.
Parking Brake
Cable Guides Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Power
Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart,
or equivalent).
7-36
USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT
Automatic
Transaxle DEXRON -III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
Superlube (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Supercharger Supercharger Oil (GM Part
No. 12345982). See “Supercharger
Oil” in the Index.
USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and
Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
Superlube (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. 12345579
or equivalent).
7-37
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service in the
boxes provided after the maintenance interval. Any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or
“Periodic Maintenance” can be added on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them.
Maintenance Record
DATE ODOMETER
READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-38
Maintenance Record
DATE ODOMETER
READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-39
Maintenance Record
DATE ODOMETER
READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-40
Maintenance Record
DATE ODOMETER
READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
8- 8-1
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact Buick if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain service
publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure
8-3 Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
8-4 Customer Assistance Offices
8-5 GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
8-5 Roadside Assistance
8-7 Canadian Roadside Assistance
8-7 Courtesy Transportation
8-9 Warranty Information
8-9 Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
8-10 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
8-10 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
8-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Buick. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be
resolved by your dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of
all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your
concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction,
the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern cannot
be resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Buick Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-521-7300. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate
at the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
8-3
When contacting Buick, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you
continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you should
file with the GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce
any additional rights you may have. Canadian owners
refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information booklet for information on the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Buick has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Buick by dialing: 1-800-83-BUICK. (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
8-4
Customer Assistance Offices
Buick encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write to Buick,
the letter should be addressed to Buick’s Customer
Assistance Center.
United States
Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
1-800-521-7300
1-800-832-8425 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112
From:
Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52 - 53 29 0 800
8-5
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward aftermarket driver
or passenger adaptive
equipment you may require
for your vehicle (hand
controls, wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call
the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. When
calling from outside Canada, please dial 1-905-644-3063.
All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance
Buick Motor Division is proud to offer Buick Premium
Roadside Assistance to customers for vehicles covered
under the 3 year/36,000 mile (60 000 km) new car
warranty (whichever occurs first).
8-6
Our commitment to Buick owners has always included
superior service through our network of Buick dealers.
Buick Premium Roadside Assistance provides an extra
measure of convenience and security.
Buick’s Roadside Assistance toll-free number is staffed
by a team of technically trained advisors, who are
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing
minor repair information over the phone or making
arrangements to tow your vehicle to the nearest
Buick dealer.
We will provide the following services for
3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km), at no expense to you:
Fuel delivery
Lock-out service (identification required)
Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service
Change a flat tire
Jump starts
We have quick, easy access to telephone numbers of the
following additional services depending on your needs:
Hotels
Glass replacement
Tire repair facilities
Rental vehicle or taxis
Airports or train stations
Police, fire department or hospitals
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Buick’s comprehensive warranty. However, when
other services are utilized, our advisors will explain any
payment obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following information to give the advisor:
Location of vehicle
Telephone number of your location
Vehicle model, year and color
Mileage of vehicle
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle license plate number
Buick reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Buick’s
judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency or
type of occurrence.
8-7
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you and
your family. Remember, we’re only a phone call away.
Buick Roadside Assistance -- 1-800-252-1112, text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
Courtesy Transportation
Buick has always exemplified quality and value in its
offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating dealers are proud
to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support
program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
’retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with
the Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your
vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department
immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for
service, unless, of course, the problem is safety-related.
If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the
work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Buick helps
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
8-8
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one
way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from
the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative, reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses up to $10 per day (five day
maximum) may be available. Claim amounts should
reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide you
with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental
vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a maximum of
$30.00 per day supported by receipts. This requires that
you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state,
local and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are
responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage
or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is not
part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate
booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information” furnished with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at
participating dealers and all program options, such as
shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.
Please contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
8-9
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS TO THE UNITED
STATES GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
8-10
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS TO THE
CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-521-7300, or write:
Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
8-11
2001 BUICK SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 2001 BUICK
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
2001 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about the
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $20.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications are available for current and past
model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please
specify year and model name of the vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:
Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
Visit Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA–MasterCard–Discover)
8-12
PUBLICATION FORM
NUMBER
Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postal
service. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call
1-800-551-4123. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return
information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied
against the original order.
ORDER TOLL FREE
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)
1-800-551-4123
(Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM EST)
FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927
Service Manual
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order form to:
HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.
2001 $120.00
2001 $50.00
2001 $20.00
2001 $15.00
TOTAL MATERIAL
Michigan Purchasers
U.S. Order Processing $6.00
Canadian Postage
GRAND TOTAL
add 6% sales tax
GM-BUI-ORD00 *(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.) Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable in U.S. funds.
(CUSTOMER’S NAME) (ATTENTION)
(STREET ADDRESS—NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
(CITY) (ZIP CODE)
DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.
(STATE)
AREA CODE
( )
PCheck or Money
Order payable to
Helm, Inc. (USA funds
only —
do not send cash.)
VISA
Discover
Account
Number:
Expiration
Date mo/yr:
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
S
ITEM DESCRIPTION NAME YEAR
VEHICLE MODEL QTY. PRICE
EACH* TOTAL
PRICE
2
0
0
1
G
M
H
I
P
T
O
A
Y
M
E
N
T
Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio
Owner’s Manual In Portfolio
Car & Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair
MasterCard
Check here if your billing address
is different from your shipping
address shown.
PUBLICATION FORM
NUMBER

Navigation menu